JP7147653B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is known one that pays out game balls based on the entry of game balls into a ball entry section provided in a game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2004-81853

Here, in gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing attention to a game.

The present invention
a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a first area through which a game ball fired by a first shooting operation can pass and through which a game ball shot by a second shooting operation different from the first shooting operation does not pass ;
a second area through which the game ball shot by the second shooting operation can pass and through which the game ball shot by the first shooting operation does not pass;
When the second shooting operation is performed in the first game situation and the game ball passes through the second area, a first privilege and a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. a means to
When the first shooting operation is performed in the first game situation and the game ball passes through the first area, the first privilege is not granted and the second privilege is granted. means and
with
When the second shooting operation is performed in a second game situation different from the first game situation and the game ball passes through the second area, neither the first privilege nor the second privilege is given. is configured as
When the second shooting operation is performed in the first game situation, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first shooting operation is performed in the first game situation ,
It is characterized in that when the second shooting operation is performed in the second game situation, it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the first shooting operation is performed in the second game situation. do.

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. (a) is a front view showing a game board unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general electric accessory. It is a front view of a guide passage part. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device with the opening/closing door omitted, and (b) is a perspective view of the variable winning device in the open state. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is explanatory drawing of a jackpot classification table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process, (b) is an explanatory diagram of a stop result table for big wins. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for V winning a prize. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an upper limit distribution table; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the opening and closing execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the opening and closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect|presentation process for opening/closing execution modes performed by MPU of the effect|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting periods. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a round start. It is a flowchart which shows a round middle use process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for round end. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a display screen; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game effect in the opening and closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows the passage structure of the variable winning device based on 3rd Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows a falling prize process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round; (a) is an explanatory diagram of an upper limit allocation table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of an opening/closing pattern table. 10 is a flow chart showing processing during opening. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for round update or ending start. (a) is a flowchart showing a shutter driving process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation mode of the shutter. (a) is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of opening/closing execution mode, (b) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the opening and closing execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the opening and closing execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the opening and closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows the passage structure of the variable winning device based on 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the variable winning device when it is in a closed state. (a) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type table, (b) is an explanatory diagram of a shutter distribution table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation mode of the shutter. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing V allocation processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an upper limit distribution table; It is a flow chart which shows processing for V winning a prize. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the opening and closing execution mode. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a display screen during an opening/closing execution mode; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a display screen during an opening/closing execution mode; (a) is a diagram showing another example of the passage structure, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of (a). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of the passage structure;

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area to be described later to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61 . A light-emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various lamp portions. Speaker units 64 are provided on both the left and right sides of the light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65 , and a lower plate 72 that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66 . The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 .

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 72 in the front door frame 14 . When the shooting handle 60 is operated, a game ball is shot toward the game area PE from a game ball shooting mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13 . In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 60, the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area PE, that is, the momentum of shooting is changed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 60 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PE every 0.6 seconds. be.

The game area PE is formed in a game board unit 24 mounted on the inner frame 13 . The game board unit 24 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 24a) will be described below. FIG. 4(a) is a front view of the game board unit 24. FIG.

The game board unit 24 includes a game board 24a mainly made of a plate material made of, for example, a transparent synthetic resin material. An opaque game area partitioning member (spacer) 301 is attached to the peripheral edge of the game board 24a so as to protrude forward from the surface of the plate material. The game area dividing member 301 has a frame shape with a substantially elliptical opening inside, and the surface of the game board 24a (plate material) can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine through the opening. In addition, an outer rail portion 52 is attached to the surface of the plate material along the opening of the game area dividing member 301, and further inside the outer rail portion 52, the left side and the lower part of the game board 24a are provided. A rail portion 51 is attached.

The game area dividing member 301, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 face the front door frame 14 or the window panel 62, and the amount of protrusion is set so that the gap between them is less than the diameter of the game ball. It is This prevents the game ball from jumping over the game area dividing member 301, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 and jumping out of the game board 24a. That is, the game area PE is partitioned by the game area partitioning member 301, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. FIG. In addition, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 form a guide rail 54 for guiding the game ball to the game area PE, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 53 when the player rotates the shooting handle 60. are guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rails 54 .

The guide rail 54 is formed on one side of the game area PE so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60 by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the side. The exit portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side of the game area PE.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the range defined as the game area PE on the game board 24a by router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a first operating port (or a first starting ball portion) 33, a second operating port (or a second starting ball portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable A display unit 36, a display unit 43 for a special figure, a display unit 44 for a normal figure, and the like are provided respectively. Note that a plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33, four balls are put out, and when a ball enters the second working port 34, three balls are paid out. is paid out. Also, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are put out, and when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are put out. be done.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number of prize balls related to the number of prize balls may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operation port 33 . Also, the number of prize balls associated with the variable winning device 32 may be the same as or less than the number of prize balls associated with other operating ports.

An out port 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24a, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. - 特許庁Even if the game ball enters the out port 37, the prize ball is not paid out. The game board 24a is also provided with a large number of nails 38 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, entering a ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A non-discharging mode is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion (center frame 302) of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the game machine from the surface of the game board 24a, the area where the game ball shot to the game area PE can flow down is defined. It is Specifically, an upper area PE1 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the center frame 302 in the game area PE, and a lower area continuous with the upper area PE1 and to the left of the center frame 302 , the right area PE3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the center frame 302, and the left area PE2 and the right area PE3. It is partitioned into a lower region PE4 which is continuous at the bottom and is a region below the center frame 302 .

Which of these areas PE1 to PE4 the game area flows down (passes through) is determined by the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 60, that is, the force of shooting the game ball. Specifically, when the player rotates the shooting handle 60 with a rotation operation amount in a first range that is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and less than the reference rotation amount, the game ball is shot. is more likely to be projected leftward than the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of upper area PE1→left area PE2→lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player rotates the shooting handle 60 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the shot game ball moves to the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. It is easier to be launched to the right than In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→right area PE3→lower area PE4. In other words, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 60, it is determined whether the game ball is to be played in the left route in which the game ball flows down the left region PE2 or in the right route in which the game ball flows down the right region PE3. , can be selected by the player.

The predetermined amount of rotation is the amount of rotation operation that allows the shot game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE. It is the rotation operation amount that makes the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 the same or substantially the same. With the rotation operation amount in the first range, the percentage of game balls flowing down the left region PE2 increases, and with the rotation operation amount in the second range, the percentage of game balls flowing down the right region PE3 increases.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower region PE4. The first operating port 33 is open upward and has a size that allows one game ball to win. Note that the first working port 33 is not provided with a member for opening and closing the first working port 33, and is always open. And, in a situation where the game ball is shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operation opening 33 is constant regardless of the game state. Also, the first working port 33 is arranged right under the stage formed in the center frame 302, and the game ball that has flowed onto the stage through the guide passage formed in the center frame 302 is pushed from the center of the stage. A game ball discharged out of the center frame 302 easily enters the first operation port 33. - 特許庁A winning sensor 33a for the first working opening is provided in the first working opening 33, and a game ball that has won the first working opening 33 is detected by the winning sensor 33a.

Here, regarding the first operation port 33, a game ball flowing down the left route can win (can be reached), and a game ball flowing down the right route cannot win (can not reach). That is, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 38 in the left area PE2, the right area PE3, and the lower area PE4 is configured to allow the game ball flowing down the left area PE2 to reach the first operation opening 33. On the other hand, it is configured not to allow the game ball that has flowed down the right side region PE3 to reach the first operating port 33. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize to the first operation opening 33, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left route.

The second operating port 34 is installed in the right region PE3. The second operating port 34 opens forward and has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The size of the second operating port 34 is such that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 303 for opening and closing the second operating port 34 . As shown in FIG. 4B, the universal electrical accessory 303 includes a plate-shaped opening/closing door 303a capable of covering the second operation opening 34 from the front of the game machine, and a universal electrical opening connected to the opening/closing door 303a. and a driving unit 303b. The opening/closing door 303a is configured to be switchable between a closed position that covers the second operation opening 34 from the front of the game machine and an open position that rotates forward from the closed position to open the second operation opening 34. . In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the opening/closing door 303a is arranged in the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the second operation opening 34, and in the open state (supporting state) in which the opening/closing door 303a is arranged in the open position. state or guide state), it becomes possible to win a prize to the second operation opening 34. In the second operation port 34, a winning sensor 34a for the second operation port is provided at a place where the game ball that has won the second operation port 34 always passes, A winning game ball is detected.

Note that the closed state of the open/close door 303a is not limited to disabling the winning of the second operating opening 34, and the winning of the second operating opening 34 is possible as long as the winning of the second operating opening 34 is less likely to occur than in the open state. can be anything. That is, the switching of the state of the open/close door 303a is made between a state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second operating port 34 and a state in which it is not impossible to win, but is less likely to win than the state in which the winning is likely to occur. It may be a configuration to switch to.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a through gate 35 is provided above (upstream side) the second operation port 34 in the right region PE3. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) that penetrates in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has entered the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PE after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34 or the variable winning device 32.例文帳に追加The through gate 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the game ball entering the through gate 35 is detected by the detection sensor 35a.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the general electrical accessory 303 of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, the result of the internal lottery is the open result (support winning), the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is terminated. When the opening and closing game (support execution mode) is executed. In the accessory opening/closing game, the general electric accessory 303 is opened in a predetermined manner.

A variable winning device 32 is arranged below (downstream side) the second operation port 34 in the right side area PE3. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24a, an open/close door 304 (see FIG. 5) for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a, and a variable winning device driving the open/close door 304. and a drive unit 305 (see FIG. 6). The open/close door 304 is configured to be switchable between a closed position that covers the big winning opening 32a from the front of the gaming machine and an open position that rotates forward from the closed position to open the big winning opening 32a. In the closed state where the opening/closing door 304 is arranged at the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 32a, and the opening state where the opening/closing door 304 is arranged at the open position makes it impossible to win the big winning opening 32a. It becomes possible.

The closed state of the opening/closing door 304 is not limited to disabling the winning of prizes in the large prize-winning port 32a, but can win prizes within a range in which it is difficult to win prizes in the large prize-winning port 32a compared to the open state. There may be. That is, the switching of the state of the opening/closing door 304 is made between a state in which the winning of a game ball to the big winning opening 32a is likely to occur, and a state in which winning is not impossible, but is more difficult to occur than the state in which the winning is likely to occur. A switching configuration may be used.

The opening/closing door 304 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state), the game ball can win or wins. It can be easily switched to the open state. Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, there is a mode in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds as the upper limit, with the lapse of a predetermined time or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes as one round.

For the second operation port 34, the through gate 35 and the variable winning device 32, when the shooting handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2, winning is not possible, and the right area PE3 Winning is possible when the shooting handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 34, the through gate 35 and the variable prize winning device 32, the game ball is shot so as to flow down the right route.

The right route is provided with a guide passage portion 401 that guides game balls flowing down the right side region PE3 to the through gate 35, the second operation port 34 and the variable winning device 32. FIG. Details of the guide passage portion 401 will be described later. In addition, a return rubber 306 (FIG. 5) is arranged at a position where a game ball flying along the guide rail 54 collides in the upstream part of the right route. The return rubber 306 is a cushioning member, and the game ball collided with the return rubber 306 flows down the right route after its momentum is weakened.

The special figure display portion 43 and the normal figure display portion 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends forward from the board surface of the game board 24a. Specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the gaming machine. is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.例文帳に追加

In order to clearly indicate the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the special figure display unit 43 enters the opening/closing execution mode by winning the jackpot in the internal lottery (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). is provided with a round display portion RS. In the round display section RS, display of the number of round games is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the display is finished when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

In addition, the special figure display unit 43 includes the first special figure display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 A second special figure display part BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning prize.

In the first special figure display unit AS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the first working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the first working port 33 The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS After the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the second special figure display part BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the second working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the second working port 34 The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the second operation port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed in the second special figure display part BS After the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Here, based on winning a prize to one of the operation ports 33, 34, the corresponding first special figure display unit AS, second special figure display unit BS start the variable display, stop display of the predetermined stop result The time until the stop display ends corresponds to one game cycle.

The display part 44 for normal figure is a display part for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the display unit 44 for the normal pattern, the winning of the through gate 35 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is performed. The result of is specified by the display. In the variable display of the pattern based on the winning to the through gate 35 as well, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the performance of the winning lottery, and thereafter the variably displayed pattern is fixed in a mode corresponding to the result of the winning lottery. The display is made once in the game round.

When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state that opens the universal electrical accessory 303, the display unit 44 for the universal diagram gives a predetermined stop result. is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing game is started. In the accessory opening/closing game, the general electric accessory 303 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the opening/closing control (switching control) to the closed state is executed at least once. In the accessory opening/closing game, when the total open period reaches a predetermined period (for example, 6 sec) after shifting to the game, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the second operation opening 34 is configured to end at

The special-figure display unit 43 and the general-figure display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but are not limited to this, and may be displayed using other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device. good too.

Next, the variable display unit 36 will be explained. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a pattern, which is one type of pattern.

The pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the pattern display device 41, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 . That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 43, the variable display is also performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, when shifting to a big winning game state in which the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset activated line.

Further, on the symbol display device 41, a hold display corresponding to the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is performed. The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the number of entering the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four. In the holding display, a predetermined holding image is displayed, and the number of holdings of the operation openings 33 and 34 is indicated by the number of displayed images. It should be noted that the number of pending items is not limited to that indicated by the above-described pending image, and may be indicated by numerical display. In addition, not limited to the symbol display device 41, for example, it may be configured to be indicated by a display unit or a light emitting unit (holding lamp unit) provided on the game board 24a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24a).

The main control device 81 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the board box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated from each other. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The performance control device 82 is provided with a performance control board that controls a display control device (not shown) as well as voice and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 81. The performance control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 and configured.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91 to which a payout mechanism 92, a discharge passage board 88 and a control device collection unit 93 are attached. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . The payout mechanism 92 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a game is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body 12 of the game machine is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The discharge passage board 88 has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 93 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 93 . Game balls that have won prizes in various prize-winning ports 31, 33, 34, 321, and 351 and game balls that have entered the out port 37 are led out to the discharge passage on the back side of the game board 24a. The discharge passage is formed to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led out to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 93 has a horizontally elongated mount, on which a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98 are mounted. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 60 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Guidance passage portion 401>
Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the configuration related to the guide passage portion 401 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front view of the guide passage portion 401. FIG.

In the right route, the outer wall portion 302a of the center frame 302, the inner side surface portion 52a of the outer rail portion 52, and the inner side surface portion 301a of the game area dividing member 301 define a passage area through which the game ball can flow down. A passage wall portion 402 extending toward the variable winning device 32 is provided in the middle of the area. The passage wall portion 402 protrudes from the surface of the game board 24a (plate material) toward the front of the game machine, thereby forming an outer passage portion 403 on the right side of the passage wall portion 402 and an inner passage portion 404 on the left side of the passage wall portion 402. is formed. The passage widths of the outer passage portion 403 and the inner passage portion 404 are larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, and form one ball passage.

The amount of protrusion of the passage wall portion 402 is set so that the gap between the window panel 62 and the game ball is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball straddles the passage wall portion 402 and the outer passage portion 403 and the inner passage portion. 404 is prevented. In addition, although not shown, a plurality of projections are provided on the side surface of the passage wall portion 402, the right outer wall portion 302b of the center frame 302, and the inner wall portion 301b of the game area partitioning member 301, and the outer passage portion 403 And a deceleration means for decelerating the speed of the game ball flowing down the inner passage portion 404 is provided.

The passage wall portion 402 is set so that its upstream tip portion 402c is at substantially the same height position as the return rubber 306, and is configured to extend downward toward the variable winning device 32 from this height position. there is Here, where the shooting speed (shooting force) of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 60, the game ball passes through the gap between the upper part of the center frame 302 and the outer rail portion 52, and the return rubber 306 When the game ball is launched at a speed (shooting force) that does not reach the , the game ball passes through the gap and flows into the right route (right area PE3), and then exits the right outer wall 302b of the center frame 302. It sits on top and moves along the right outer wall portion 302b. As a result, the game ball flows into the inlet portion 404 a of the inner passage portion 404 and flows down the inner passage portion 404 . On the other hand, when the game ball is shot at such a speed as to reach the return rubber 306, the game ball collides with the return rubber 306 and is weakened, and then falls downward to the outer passage portion. 403 and flows down the outer passage portion 403 . In other words, by adjusting the shooting speed of the game ball, the player can distinguish between hitting the game ball through the inner passage portion 404 and passing the game ball through the outer passage portion 403 .

The height position of the upstream end portion 402 c of the passage wall portion 402 does not necessarily have to be substantially the same as the height position of the return rubber 306 . That is, since it is sufficient if the inner passage portion 404 and the outer passage portion 403 can be separately hit, when the game ball is hit with a strength that reaches the return rubber 306, the game ball and the passage wall portion 402 (upstream Set to an arbitrary height position as long as it can avoid collision with the side tip portion 402c) and guide the game ball that collides with the return rubber 306 and falls to the outer passage portion 403 can do.

A through gate 35 is arranged in the middle of the outer passage portion 403, and the game ball can be passed through the through gate 35 by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the outer passage portion 403. It has become. A second operating port 34 is arranged below the through gate 35 . The second working port 34 is arranged so as to straddle the inner passage portion 404 and the outer passage portion 403, and it is possible to win the game ball into the second working port 34 from either of the passage portions 403, 404. It has become.

A variable winning device 32 is arranged below the second operation port 34 . The variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a) is arranged so as to straddle the inner passage portion 404 and the outer passage portion 403,
A game ball flowing down the outer path part 403 is guided to the right side area of the variable winning device 32 , and a game ball flowing down the inner path part 404 is guided to the left side area of the variable winning device 32 .

The opening and closing doors 303a and 304 of the general electric accessory 303 and the variable winning device 32 are installed so as to be parallel (more specifically, substantially flush) with the front surface of the game board 24a when arranged in the closed position. In a situation where the general electric accessory 303 and the variable winning device 32 are closed, game balls can pass in front of the opening/closing doors 303a and 304. FIG.

In addition, in order to avoid interference between the opening/closing door 303a of the general electrical accessory 303 provided in the second operation port 34 and the passage wall portion 402, the passage wall portion 402 is not provided in front of the opening/closing door 303a. It's becoming That is, the passage wall portion 402 includes an upper wall portion 402a extending from the upstream tip portion 402c to near the upper end of the second working port 34, and a lower wall portion 402a extending from near the lower end of the second working port 34 to near the upper end of the variable winning device 32. 402b.

<Variable winning device 32>
Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 32 in the closed state, (b) is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 32 in the open state, and FIG. It is a front view of the variable prize winning device 32 in an omitted state, and (b) is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 32 in the open state. 6(a) and 6(b) are cross-sectional views corresponding to the cross section taken along the line A--A in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 5, an opening 75 penetrating through the game board 24a in the thickness direction is formed at the place where the variable winning device 32 is arranged on the game board 24a. The variable winning device 32 has a plate-like base body 501, and by fitting this base body into the opening 75 from the front of the game machine, the variable winning device 32 is attached to the game board 24a.

The base body 501 is formed so as to be parallel to the front surface of the game board 24a, and a game ball can pass in front thereof. An opening that opens forward is formed in the central portion of the base body 501, and the opening forms a large winning opening 32a.

As already described, the variable winning device 32 is provided with the opening/closing door 304 for opening and closing the big winning opening 32a, and the driving section 305 for driving the opening/closing door 304 to open and close. The driving unit 305 has a solenoid as a driving source and a link mechanism as driving force transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the solenoid to the opening/closing door 304 . The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . When the solenoid is driven, the open/close door 304 rotates forward and displaces to the open position, and the variable winning device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the open/close door 304 returns from the open position to the closed position by the biasing force of the biasing means (such as a spring), and the variable winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state. be replaced.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the rear side of the base body 501 is provided with a passage portion 502 that guides the game ball that has won the big prize opening 32a to the rear of the game board 24a. The passage portion 502 has a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and on the left and right sides of the back wall portion 503 of the passage portion 502, there are right entrances for guiding the game balls in the passage portion 502 to the rear. A section 504 and a left inlet section 505 are provided. Each of the entrance portions 504 and 505 penetrates the inner wall portion 503 in the thickness direction, and each has a size that allows one game ball to pass through.

As shown in FIG. 6B, behind the right inlet 504, a right vertical passage 506 extending vertically is provided. The right vertical passage portion 506 communicates with the passage portion 502, and guides downward the game balls that have entered the right inlet portion 504 among the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 32a (passage portion 502). The game ball guided by the right vertical passage portion 506 is guided to the discharge passage board 88 (see FIG. 3) and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . A V winning sensor 507 for detecting a game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 is arranged in the middle of the right vertical passage portion 506 . The V winning sensor 507 is electrically connected to the main controller 81, and predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main controller 81 when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507. be. Based on this detection information, the main controller 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the V prize sensor 507 .

As already explained, when the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, a plurality of round games are executed. On the condition that (occurrence of V winning), the next round game is executed. Therefore, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning sensor 507 during the round game, the opening/closing execution mode ends even before the final round game ends. Here, the round game means that the variable winning device 32 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the variable winning control to be closed is executed at least once. In the present embodiment, the variable prize winning control is executed once for one round game.

Incidentally, the V winning sensor 507 plays a role of detecting the occurrence of the V winning as well as detecting whether or not the game ball enters the big winning opening 32a. Therefore, when detection information indicating that a game ball has passed through the sensor 507 is output from the V winning sensor 507, the main control device 81 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 32a and that a V winning has occurred. grasp each.

In addition, a translucent portion is provided in front of the V winning sensor 507 so that the V winning sensor 507 can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. As a result, the player can visually check whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning sensor 507, thereby preventing the player from not knowing whether or not the V winning has occurred in the opening/closing execution mode (round game). .

As shown in FIG. 7A, behind the left entrance portion 505, a left vertical passage portion 508 extending vertically is provided. The left vertical passage portion 508 communicates with the passage portion 502, and guides downward the game balls that have entered the left entrance portion 505 among the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 32a (passage portion 502). The game ball guided by the left vertical passage portion 508 is led out to the discharge passage board 88 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . A winning sensor 509 for detecting a game ball entering the left entrance portion 505 is arranged in the middle of the left vertical passage portion 508 . The prize winning sensor 509 is electrically connected to the main controller 81 , and predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main controller 81 when the game ball passes through the detection area of the prize winning sensor 509 . Based on this detection information, the main controller 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning sensor 509 .

In addition, unlike the V winning sensor 507, the winning sensor 509 detects only whether or not a game ball enters the big winning hole 32a. In addition, a translucent portion is provided in front of the winning sensor 509, so that the winning sensor 509 can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Even if the winning sensor 509 is not visible, the occurrence of the winning to the big winning hole 32a can be grasped by visually recognizing the big winning hole 32a.

The passage width of the right vertical passage portion 506 and the left vertical passage portion 508 is larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is a row ball passage.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, a partition portion 511 is provided between the right inlet portion 504 and the left inlet portion 505 in the inner wall portion 503 of the passage portion 502 . The partition part 511 protrudes from the front surface of the back wall part 503 toward the front of the game machine, and partitions the inside of the passage part 502 into a right space and a left space. In addition, the partition part 511 is located directly below the passage wall part 402 (lower wall part 402b) provided above the variable prize winning device 32, and is arranged so as to line up with the passage wall part 402 in a straight line. there is Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the outer passage portion 403 of the guide passage portion 401 flows into the right entrance portion 504, passes through the V winning sensor 507, and passes through the inner passage portion 404. The game ball flowing down flows into the left entrance portion 505 and passes through the winning sensor 509 .

In addition, a protruding portion 512 is formed on the rear portion 304a of the opening/closing door 304 (the ball receiving portion when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) so as to correspond to the partition portion 511 in the big winning opening 32a. As a result, even if the game ball placed on the back surface portion 304a of the opening/closing door 304 laterally moves, it is suppressed from moving to the area on the opposite side. As a result, game balls flowing down the passages 403 and 404 can be successfully guided to the entrances 504 and 505 corresponding to the passages 403 and 404, respectively.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 112 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main controller 81 and a payout controller 97 . In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115 , and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115 .

Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112 . The various sensors include a general winning opening 31, a first working opening 33, a second working opening 34, a through gate 35, a general winning opening winning sensor 31a for detecting winning to the variable winning device 32, and a first working opening winning. A sensor 33a, a second opening winning sensor 34c, a through winning sensor 35a, a V winning sensor 507, a winning sensor 509, and the like are provided. In the MPU 112, based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 507, and 509, winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section is performed. In addition, the MPU 112 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34, and the through gate 35. FIG.

An output side of the MPU 112 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, based on the winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

Further, to the output side of the MPU 112, as various drive units, a drive unit 303b for the universal electrical accessory 303 and a drive unit 305 for the variable winning device 32 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game state) occurs, the drive unit 305 is controlled by the MPU 112 so that the opening/closing door 304 of the variable winning device 32 is driven. In addition, when the general electric accessory 303 is won in the open state, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the drive unit 303b so that the open/close door 303a is opened and closed. In addition, at each special figure game round, display control of the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS in the special figure display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112, and at the time of the jackpot game Display control of the round display portion RS in the display portion 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general electric accessory 303 is to be specified, the MPU 112 performs display control of the general map display unit 44 .

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112. Through this external output terminal 99, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections and jackpot information is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information related to the lottery result such as is output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped by the hall computer HC.

The blackout monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power and launch control 98 and also monitors the output of the power and launch control 98 at a stable 24 volt DC voltage. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81 .

Further, the power supply and shooting control device 98 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24a, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54 toward the guide rail 54, and the game ball is fired by supplying a drive signal from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid fired.

The performance control device 82 drives and controls the light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. .

An MPU 242 is mounted on a performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command is received. It also receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as variation commands, type commands, and variation end commands. It also receives open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as an opening command, a closing command, an opening command, and an ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81 . The received command is stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 . Then, processing such as analysis of the stored command is performed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas. It is possible to do

The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212 is also connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which an MPU 272 in which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277 are mounted. there is

The MPU 272 receives, from the effect control device 82, a pending display control command (holding display control information) for holding display control, a game round control command (game round control information) for performing variable display of symbols, It receives an opening/closing execution mode command (opening/closing execution mode information) for displaying moving images during the opening/closing execution mode. Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, to generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 272 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 274 .

The VDP 275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP 275 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 272 and the video RAM 277 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 276 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 276 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 276 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 276 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 .

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 277, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9(a) to (j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 is set with three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen G is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It is designed to be

In addition, the display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a result of the big win.

The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the one described above, and may be arbitrarily selected. Combinations of symbols corresponding to big hits and misses can be changed as appropriate.

In the lower left part of the display screen G, a first reserved display area Ga is set, and in the lower right part of the display screen G, a second reserved display area Gb is set.

In the first reservation display area (non-priority side reservation display area) Ga, the same number of unit reservation display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. It is divided and displayed so that it is displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operation port 33, the maximum number of reservations is four, and correspondingly, the first unit reservation display area Ga1, the first A two-unit reserved display area Ga2, a third unit reserved display area Ga3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 is one, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball is the first operation. When the number of pending winnings in the mouth 33 is four, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Ga1 to the fourth unit pending display area Ga4.

In addition, the second reservation display area (priority side reservation display area) Gb has the same number of unit reservation display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34. It is divided and displayed so that it is set up. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operation port 34, the maximum number of reservations is four. A two-unit reserved display area Gb2, a third unit reserved display area Gb3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34 is 1, the image for reservation is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball is displayed in the second operation opening 34 When the number of pending prizes is 4, the pending images are displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Gb1 to the fourth unit pending display area Gb4.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries in MPU 112 of Main Control Unit 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, the setting of the display of the special figure display unit 43, the setting of the performance contents of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and the pattern display device 41 fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable display time in the special figure display unit 43 and the pattern display device 41 are determined. and a variation type counter CS to be used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the electric role product open counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electric role product 303 of the second operation port 34 is in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 . In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is displayed when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs. Then, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as an acquired information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special figure display portion reserved area Ra and a second special figure display portion reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb each have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. In addition, the said pending|holding information corresponds to special information or information for determination.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are reserved and stored. In addition, a total number of reserved storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 114b, and the number of winning history to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is reserved and stored in the total number of reservation storage area. Information for specifying is stored.

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 43. Based on the various numerical information stored in the area AE, determination of success or failure is performed.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section.

The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 113a as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 113 . As the right/wrong table, a right/wrong table for the low-probability mode (low-probability right/wrong information group) and a right/wrong table for the high-probability mode (high-probability right/wrong information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot is, for example, 2, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/300. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is, for example, 20, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/30. In this manner, in each win/fail table, random numbers are set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the win/fail table for the high-probability mode than in the win/fail table for the low-probability mode. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a wrong result except for the value of the random number that wins the jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are divided into two types: (1) a lottery mode in the winning/failure lottery means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode; It is set by providing different conditions.

As a support mode in the general electric role 303 of the second operating port 34, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the general electric role 303 (second A low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) are set.

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role product opening lottery using the electric role product opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). , In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric role 303 is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the open period is set longer. It is In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the general electric role item 303 occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closed period is set shorter than one open period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It is

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the high frequency support mode is higher than the low frequency support mode in terms of increasing the winning frequency to the second operation opening 34 per unit time (for example, 1 minute) or per unit number of game balls fired (for example, 100) The configuration of is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role item open lottery. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by changing any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the open period, and the winning probability.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 113b as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113. FIG. Here, the contents of the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 12, when winning to the first operating port 33 occurs (for the first special figure display unit AS) and when winning to the second operating port 34 occurs (second special figure display BS) is used in common.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the jackpot type table, 16R jackpot result A, 16R jackpot result B, and 16R jackpot result C are set as allocation destinations of game results (jackpot types). Of these, the 16R jackpot result A and the 16R jackpot result B are the probability variable jackpot results, and the 16R jackpot result C is the normal jackpot result (non-probability variable jackpot result).

The 16R jackpot result A to the 16R jackpot result C all involve 16 round games at maximum. However, only when a V win occurs during the execution of one round game, the next round game is executed, and if the round game ends without a V win occurring, the 16th The open/close execution mode is terminated even if the round game is not reached. In the first round game, the number of winning game balls into the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a) reaches the upper limit winning number, and the opening period of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit opening period. Terminates when any condition is satisfied.

The 16R jackpot result A and the 16R jackpot result B are jackpot results in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode in this case are continued until the next big win occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode is started). Incidentally, during execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode.

The 16R jackpot result C is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode set in this case continues until the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the mode reaches the end reference number (eg 100 times), and then the support mode is low frequency support mode. In this case, the number of executions of the special symbol game times is the total number of executions of the first special symbol game times and the second special symbol game times.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state refers to a state in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C are provided with a difference in the lottery mode and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode as described above. A difference is provided in the setting mode of the upper limit winning number (the winning number of game balls to the variable winning device 32 that ends the round game). The setting mode of the upper limit winning number of each round game for each jackpot result will be described later in detail.

In the jackpot type table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0" to "19" correspond to the 16R jackpot result A, and "20" to "59" correspond to the 16R jackpot result B. , and "60" to "99" correspond to the 16R jackpot result C. That is, when a big win is won, the probability of 16R big win result A is 20/100, and the probability of 16R big win result B and 16R big win result C is 400/100, respectively.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to use a common jackpot type table when winning to the first operating port 33 and when winning to the second operating port 34 occurs. It may be configured to use separate jackpot type tables for the figure display portion AS and for the second special figure display portion BS. Also, the assignment of the jackpot type counter C2 to each game result is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, and can be arbitrarily set.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section. Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113 . However, in the game round in which the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the MPU 112 determines whether or not to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and in a game cycle in which the variable winning device 32 is in the opening and closing execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) in the pattern display device 41 is started. , means a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. It is a display state in which combinations of possible ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line within the display screen of the symbol display device 41. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 10 will be described. First, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are started to be displayed at high speed. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern is displayed. After that, the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display in which the player can easily recognize the displayed symbols. Then, when the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stop-displaying main symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Then, when the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display and the open/close execution mode occurs, the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are attached. is stop-displayed on the reach line, and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform production, and those that perform ready-to-win production by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of ready-to-win patterns. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS determines the variation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS of the special figure display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the MPU 112. It is used in The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 303 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory open counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the general electrical function 303 is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the general electrical function 303 is not controlled to be open.

In the MPU 112, using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE, the variation display time in the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is determined. A variable display time table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is used. Also, in the MPU 112, using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the stop result in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS is determined. However, the stop result table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is used for the determination.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 to advance the game will be described. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 112 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 507, and 509 are read, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 507, and 509 are determined, and the detection information is stored. Execute the process. In addition, when the winning of the game ball is detected by various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 507, 509 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, to instruct the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the prize ball command for For example, when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is detected by the V winning sensor 507 or the winning sensor 509, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is set. . In subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 35, the number of stored role-things stored in the power reserve area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). On this condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 114c.

In the subsequent step S105, a prize winning process for the operation opening is executed. In the prize winning process for the operating port, based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the operating ports 33, 34, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is set based on the winning, and a jackpot random number counter is set. Information acquisition processing for storing each value of C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and variation type counter CS is performed.

In the information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first operation opening 33 (start winning). When the first operation port 33 is won, grasp the number of reservation information stored in the first special figure display unit reservation area Ra, and use the grasped number as the first start reservation storage number RaN set. On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the first operating port 33, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 (start winning). When the second operation port 34 is won, grasp the number of reservation information stored in the second special figure display unit reservation area Rb, and use the grasped number as the second start reservation storage number RbN set. Then, it is determined whether or not the set start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). When the number N of starting pending memories is less than the upper limit value, the number N of starting pending memories in the corresponding result display holding area is updated to be increased by one. When the first start reservation storage number RaN is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first special figure display unit reservation area Ra is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, and when the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS Each value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second special figure display portion reservation area Rb.

After executing the winning process for the working opening in step S105, in step S106, the V winning process for detecting the occurrence of the V winning is executed, and then the timer interrupt process ends. The V winning process will be described in detail later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S206 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed during the remaining time.

In the normal process, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S201. In the external signal output process of step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . Moreover, when the command for production|presentation is set, it is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S202, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114 .

In the subsequent step S203, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In this game round control process, determination of whether a big hit is successful or not, and determination of distribution of the type of big win, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, setting of variable display by the special symbol display unit 43, etc. are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S203, the process proceeds to step S204, and the game state transition process is executed. By this game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode or the like. Details of the game round control process in step S203 and the game state transition process in step S204 will be described later.

In subsequent step S205, an electric support process for driving and controlling the universal electric accessory 303 provided in the second operation port 34 is executed. In this electrical service support process, the electrical service for determining whether or not to open the general electrical service material 303 using the numerical information acquired from the electrical service material release counter C4 stored in the electrical service reservation area 114c of the RAM 114 is performed. An open lottery is performed, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the general electric role item 303 is executed. In addition, the display control of the display unit 44 for normal figure is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

After that, in step S206, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In subsequent step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 114 . The power failure flag is set when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 . Further, in step S210, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that a power failure has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S211 onwards is executed. That is, in step S211, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S212 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S213 access to the RAM 114 is prohibited. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the game round control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game round control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 114 e of the RAM 114 . The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S302, that is, the game round start process of steps S303 to S305 and the game round progress process of steps S306 to S309 are not executed. Terminate the turn control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the special figure display section 43 is in the process of variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is being displayed in a variable manner. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 stores a flag during variable display. The variable display flag is stored when the variable display is started for either the first special figure display portion AS or the second special figure display portion BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the special figure display unit 43 is not in the process of variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start processing of steps S303 to S305. In the game turn start processing, first in step S303, whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the starting pending memory numbers of the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, is "0" judge. When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation memory numbers RaN and RbN for both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are "0". Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is.

When the common reservation number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the first special figure display section reservation area Ra or the second special figure display section reservation area Rb is set for variable display in step S304 Execute the data setting process for In subsequent step S305, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed, and then the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the fluctuation start processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16(a).

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode flag (high-probability state information) is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 114e provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . The high-probability mode flag is stored at the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result in the event of a variable probability jackpot result, after which a shift to a new opening/closing execution mode occurs, and at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Cleared flags.

If the mode is not the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode in step S402. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches one of the two values set as jackpot winning values in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. judge. On the other hand, if it is the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode in step S403. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches any of the 20 values set as jackpot winning values in the success/failure table for the high probability mode. judge.

After step S402 or step S403 is executed, in steps S404 to S411, processing for setting the game result (jackpot type) of this game round, and the first special figure display unit AS or Processing for setting the stop result when ending the variable display executed in any of the second special figure display units BS is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S402 or step S403 is a big hit. In the case of winning the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S405, and the jackpot type table (see FIG. 12) is referred to to determine the distribution of the jackpot type. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 is the numerical range of the 16R jackpot result A, the numerical range of the 16R jackpot result B, and the value of the 16R jackpot result C. Determine which of the numeric ranges is included.

In the following step S406, the stop result table for the jackpot (FIG. 16(b)) stored in the stop result table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the special figure display unit 43 (first special figure display unit AS or second 2 Set the stop result for the big hit to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit BS). Specifically, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range ("0" to "19") of the 16R jackpot result A, as the stop result When the stop result A is set and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is included in the numerical range ("20" to "59") of the 16R jackpot result B, the stop result B is set as the stop result, When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is included in the numerical range ("60" to "99") of the 16R jackpot result B, the stop result C is set as the stop result. Stop result A to stop result C are stop results in which the display mode or display content of the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 43 is different.

In the subsequent step S407, various big hit flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 based on the allocation result of the step S405. Specifically, when the distribution result is the 16R jackpot result A, the 16R flag A is stored, and when the distribution result is the 16R jackpot result B, the 16R flag B is stored and the distribution result is the 16R. In the case of a jackpot result C, a 16R flag C is stored.

When the negative determination is made in step S404, the process proceeds to step S408, and the stop result for the disconnection that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43 (first special figure display unit AS or second special figure display unit BS) is displayed. set.

After executing the process of step S407 or step S408, in step S409, the variable display time of the special figure game round of this time is set. In the variable display time setting process, the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, and the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS is selected from the variable display time table stored in the ROM 113 .

In the following step S410, a variable command including information on the variable display time and a type command including information on the game result (jackpot type, etc.) are set. The set variation command and type command are transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 transmits the received command to the display control device 212 while maintaining its information form. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 and the like so as to start the performance of the game round.

After that, in step S411, among the first special figure display part AS and the second special figure display part BS, the display part corresponding to the game round of this time is caused to start the variable display of the pattern. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 15), when the affirmative determination is made in step S302, that is, when the special figure display unit 43 is in the process of variable display, the game round progress processing of steps S306 to S309 to run. In the game round progress processing, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of RAM 114 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable start process at the start of the game cycle. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, display control (light emission control of each display segment) is performed so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the special figure display part related to the game round this time. , ends this game round control process.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S308. In the fluctuation end process, the information set based on the result of the winning lottery of the fluctuation start process is specified, and the special figure display is performed so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed in the special figure display unit 43. 43 is controlled.

In the subsequent step S309, a fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S309 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The performance control device 82 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 receives the variation end command to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

In addition, the pattern (stop result) of the display part 43 for special figures stop-displayed (confirmed display) as described above continues to be displayed over a predetermined stop-display period. In addition, the stop result for the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot continues to be displayed even after the special game cycle ends (after the stop display period has elapsed), and is continuously displayed during execution of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot. be done. Then, the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, and the stop display state is canceled with the start of the first special figure game cycle (variation display of special figure) after the opening and closing execution mode.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S204 in the normal processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the game state transition process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation display of the pattern in the first special figure display portion AS or the second special figure display portion BS of one game round is finished. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing at which the variable display ends, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the game result of the current game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S504. In the start process, it is checked whether the variable winning device 32 is closed before the opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode start process, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 32 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the processing for setting the opening period, waiting period information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . The value of the timer counter T is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec cycle, each time timer interrupt processing is started).

In the subsequent step S505, the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set, and the number of rounds to be executed in the current opening/closing execution mode is set. In this embodiment, since the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot result is 16, "16" is set as the value of the round counter RC.

In the following step S506, as a round display start process, the round display section RS is controlled to display the number of rounds of the open/close execution mode to be executed this time ("16" for any jackpot result in this embodiment). The display of the number of rounds continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In the subsequent step S507, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time is performed.

Then, in step S508, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501 (if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S509 to determine whether or not the waiting period for opening has elapsed. If the waiting period for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting period for the opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S510. Here, the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the big winning opening opening/closing process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". When the value of the round counter RC is "0", the large winning opening opening/closing process is ended. It is determined whether or not there is (whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state). In this step, such determination processing is executed based on the drive state of the drive unit 305 for the variable winning device.

When the big winning opening 32a is not opened, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the process for opening and closing the big winning opening is terminated. In step S604, a setting process for each round is executed to set the upper limit opening period of the variable winning device 32 and the upper limit winning number to the variable winning device 32 in each round game in the open/close execution mode.

In the following step S605, the driving section 305 is brought into the driving state so as to open the variable winning device 32. FIG. After that, an opening command is set in step S606, and the big winning opening opening/closing process ends. The opening command set in this step is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in normal processing (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each round based on the received open command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

When the determination in step S602 is affirmative (when the big winning opening 32a is open), the process proceeds to step S607, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". The value of the timer counter T in this case corresponds to the upper limit opening period of the variable winning device 32 set in step S604, and this step determines whether the opening period of the big winning opening 32a has reached the upper limit opening period. It determines whether or not

When the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (when the opening period of the big winning opening 32a has not reached the upper limit opening period), in step S608, the detection state of the V winning sensor 507 or the winning sensor 509 (step Based on the reading result of various sensors in S101), it is determined whether or not a prize to the variable prize winning device 32 has occurred. If the variable winning device 32 has not won a prize, the large winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The value of the winning counter PC provided at 114d is decremented by one. Winning counter PC is a counter for counting the winning number of game balls to variable winning device 32. After the value corresponding to the upper limit winning number is set in step S604, the winning to variable winning device 32 is performed. is decremented by one each time. In the subsequent step S610, it is determined whether or not the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114.

Here, the V winning process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the V winning process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S702, and V winning occurs based on the detection state of the V winning sensor 507 provided in the variable winning device 32 (the reading result of various sensors in step S101). It is determined whether or not (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507).

If it is determined that the V winning has occurred, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the V winning is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period that is determined in anticipation of a period in which a V winning can occur normally. For example, the period during which the round game is executed is set as the valid period. If it is determined that the validity period has not expired, the process proceeds to step S704, an error command is set as an abnormality has occurred, and then the V winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 14), and the effect control device 82 performs the predetermined error notification so that the display control device 212, the light emission It controls the unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is still valid, the process advances to step S705 to store the V prize flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. In the following step S706, a V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The V winning command is a command for notifying the effect control device 82 that the V winning has occurred. sent. In the effect control device 82, when the V winning command is received, the pattern display device 41, the light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 execute effects such as notifying the occurrence of the V winning and congratulating the V winning. It controls the display control device 212 and the like.

After execution of step S706, if affirmative determination is made in step S701 (when V winning flag is stored) or negative determination is made in step S702 (when V winning has not occurred), the V winning process is terminated. .

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 18), when it is determined that the V winning flag is stored in step S610, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the V winning flag stored in the various flags storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the continuation flag is set in the various flags storage area 114e. The continuation flag is a flag indicating that the next round game should be executed, in other words, the open/close execution mode should be continued even after the round game being executed is finished.

In the subsequent step S612, the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when a V winning occurs, the value of the winning counter PC is forcibly set to "0" regardless of the value of the winning counter PC at that time.

After execution of step S612 or when a negative determination is made in step S610 (when V winning has not occurred), it is determined in step S613 whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". When it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter PC is not "0", the big winning gate opening/closing process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if the determination in step S607 is affirmative (if the value of the timer counter is "0"), the process proceeds to step S614, and the variable winning device 32 is turned on. The drive unit 305 is deactivated to close.

In the subsequent step S615, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. If the continuation flag is stored, in step S616, the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is decremented by 1, and the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode is updated. In the following step S617, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", in step S618, a waiting period between rounds (round interval period), that is, a closed period until the variable winning device 32 is opened again is set. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "1000" corresponding to the waiting period (2 sec).

After that, a close command is set in step S619, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 of normal processing (FIG. 14). A performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the waiting period between rounds based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

If it is determined in step S617 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", the ending process is executed in step S620. In the start process, an ending waiting period is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the timer counter T is set with waiting period information for the ending pre-stored in the ROM 113 .

After that, in step S621, an ending command is set, and the big winning opening opening/closing process ends. The ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). A performance control device 82 determines the content of performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined performance is executed.

If it is determined in step S615 that the continuation flag is not stored, the process advances to step S622 to set the value of the round counter RC to "0" in order to end the open/close execution mode. After that, the process advances to step S620 to execute ending start processing.

Next, the setting process for each round in step S604 in the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this setting process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "16". That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be set is the first round of the open/close execution mode. When the value of the round counter RC is not "16", that is, when the round game to be set is the round game after the second round, in step S802, the continuation stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. Clear the flag.

After execution of step S802 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S801 (when the value of the round counter RC is "16"), in step S803, the opening period of the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set. . Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "15000" corresponding to the upper limit open period (30 sec) for one round.

In the subsequent step S804, based on the jackpot type flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the jackpot type corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode being executed or being executed is grasped. For example, when the 16R jackpot A flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e, the 16R jackpot result A is grasped as the jackpot type corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. Also, in this step, based on the value of the round counter RC, it is grasped what round the round game to be set (the round game to be started from now) is. In the subsequent step S805, the upper limit number distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the upper limit number of winning prizes for the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set.

Here, the upper limit allocation table will be described with reference to FIG. In the upper limit allocation table, the upper limit winning number of each round game is defined for each jackpot type. The upper limit winning number corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is set to 8 in any round game, and is unified between rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit number of winning prizes corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C is diversified between rounds so that the upper limit number of winning prizes differs in each round game. That is, in a predetermined round game, the upper limit winning number is the first number, and in other round games, the upper limit winning number is the second number different from the first number. This causes variations in the number of winning prizes. Also, in the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C, for example, the upper limit winning number of the round game in the second round is 4 in the former case and 2 in the latter case. The upper limit winning number in the round game is different.

With the above configuration, for example, when focusing on the round game of the second round, from the player's point of view, the round game may end when eight game balls win in the variable winning device 32. A round game may end when four game balls win, and a round game may end when two game balls win. cannot be defined unambiguously. Therefore, the player plays the game by predicting the maximum winning number in each round game.

It should be noted that the specific upper limit number of prizes shown in FIG. 21 is merely an example, and the numbers are not limited to these numbers. Also, although the upper limit winning number of each round game of the 16R jackpot result A is the same in all round games, it may be different depending on the round game, such as the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C. At that time, the upper limit winning number of the round game of the same order shall be different from those of the 16R big win result B and the 16R big win result C.例文帳に追加

Returning to the description of the setting process for each round (FIG. 20), in step S805, the result of grasping what round the round game of the big hit type and setting target in step S804 is, and the upper limit number Based on the minute table, the corresponding maximum winning number is derived. In the following step S806, a value corresponding to the above derived upper limit winning number is set as the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. For example, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot result B, the round game to be set is the 7th round game, and the derived upper limit winning number is 5, the value of the winning counter PC is "5 ”. After step S806 is executed, the setting process for each round ends.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 17), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S510, it is determined in step S511 whether or not the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0", it is determined by the timer counter T whether or not the waiting period for the ending has ended in step S512. If the waiting period for the ending has not ended, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the waiting period for ending has ended, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S513. In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode are set.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the 16R big hit flag A or the 16R big hit flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. When the 16R jackpot flag A or the 16R jackpot flag B is stored, the process proceeds to step S902, where the jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is deleted, and the high probability mode flag is set in the area 114e. set. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.

In the subsequent step S903, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. As a result, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag respectively set in steps S902 and S903 are erased in step S504 (FIG. 17) when the next jackpot is won.

When a negative determination is made in step S901 (when the 16R jackpot flag A or 16R jackpot flag B is not stored), the process proceeds to step S904 to set the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. In the following step S905, "100" is set to the number-of-games counter GC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM114. This number-of-games counter GC is decremented by one each time a special figure game is executed while the support mode is shifting to the high-frequency support mode. When the number-of-games counter GC becomes "0", the high frequency support mode flag set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased. That is, the high frequency support mode ends and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

After executing the process of step S903 or step S905, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 17), after executing the process of step S513, the process for ending the display of the round display section RS is executed in step S514. Next, in step S515, end processing of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition processing is ended. In the closing process of the opening/closing execution mode, transition to the opening/closing execution mode and erasure of various counters and flags used during the opening/closing execution mode are performed.

<Regarding the game flow during open/close execution mode>
Next, the game flow during the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 23 and 24. FIG.

As already described, in the present embodiment, the next round game is not executed unless V winning occurs in the round game being executed, and if the round game ends without V winning occurring, at that point The opening/closing execution mode is configured to end (see FIG. 18). In addition, when V winning occurs during the round game, even if the number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit winning number, the round game is finished at the time when the V winning occurs. (See Figure 18). Therefore, if the maximum winning number is set to n, if the V winning is not generated until the n-1th winning, and the V winning is generated at the nth winning, the player can win in one round game. While maximizing the total number of prize balls that can be obtained, the right to execute the next round game can be acquired.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 23, inside the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, there are a left entrance portion 505 which does not involve the occurrence of V winning and a right entrance portion 504 which causes the occurrence of V winning. is provided. Furthermore, on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32, game balls shot with less than a predetermined amount of strength are guided to the left entrance section 505, and game balls shot with more than a predetermined amount of strength are guided to the right entrance section 504. A guide passage portion 401 is provided for guiding to.

In such a configuration, when the player adjusts the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60 and shoots the game ball with a force that passes through the inner passage portion 404, the left side of the variable winning device 32 is opened. A game ball wins at the entrance portion 505 . In this case, while the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 32 is counted up and a predetermined number (15) of winning balls are paid out, V winning does not occur. On the other hand, when the game ball is shot with the strength to pass through the outer passage portion 403, the game ball wins the right entrance portion 504 in a state where the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state. In this case, the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 is counted up, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out, and a V winning occurs. Therefore, the player can select the timing at which the V prize is to be generated while winning the prize ball by causing the variable prize winning device 32 to win the game ball. Then, the player shoots the game ball with the strength to enter the left side entrance portion 505 until the n-1th prize is won, and shoots the game ball with the strength to enter the right side entrance portion 504 at the nth prize. An ideal operation mode is to perform the switching operation so as to perform the switching operation.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the player cannot or cannot determine the maximum winning number of each round game in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, the maximum winning number of each round game is diversified so that the player cannot uniquely determine the maximum winning number of each round game. Moreover, since the diversification of the upper limit number of winning prizes is achieved not only in one opening/closing execution mode but also among the types of jackpots, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand the upper limit number of winning prizes in each round game.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit winning number of each round game is not notified (display or voice output) so that the player can recognize it, and the upper limit winning number is not specified. For this reason, the player cannot obtain information on the maximum number of prizes to be won from the notification, making it even more difficult to determine the maximum number of prizes to be won in each round game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the maximum winning number, the opening mode (the number of openings and the maximum opening period) of the variable winning device 32 in each round game is made common. Therefore, it is impossible or difficult for the player to determine the maximum winning number from the behavior of the variable winning device 32, making it even more difficult to grasp the maximum winning number for each round game.

For these reasons, the player has no choice but to predict the upper limit winning number of the round game in the game in each round game. will be playing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, the relationship between the player's shooting operation mode and the game result will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 24(a), an operation of shooting a game ball with such strength that the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505 where V winning does not occur is called the first operation, and the right side where V winning occurs is referred to as the first operation. The operation of shooting the game ball at the entrance part 504 with the strength that the game ball wins is called the second operation, the first operation is performed until the n-1th prize is won, and the second operation is performed at the nth prize. An operation is called a specific operation.

When the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is executed, in this mode, the maximum winning number is set to 8 in all round games (see FIG. 21). In this case, as shown in FIG. 24(b), when the specific operation is performed in all the round games, the round games of the 1st round to the 16th round are all performed, and the maximum (15 prize balls x 8 wins = 90 prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to obtain a total number of prize balls of 90×16 rounds=1920 in the open/close execution mode.

As described above, it is not easy for the player to perform the above operation because it is impossible or difficult to determine the maximum winning number of each round game from the player's point of view. Therefore, it is assumed that there are players who give priority to continuing the round (executing the opening/closing execution mode until the final round) rather than the number of prize balls to be paid out per round. In this case, the aim is to win a prize to the right entrance portion 504 from the first prize in each round game, that is, the second operation is performed in all round games. The number of balls is 15×16 rounds=240. Therefore, compared to the case where the specific operation is performed in all round games, the total number of prize balls obtained in the open/close execution mode is greatly reduced.

When the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed, in this mode, the upper limit winning number of each round game is diversified, and is set to each number shown in FIG. In this case, when the specific operation is performed in all round games, as shown in FIG. 24(c), 15 prize balls×92 wins=1380 total prize balls can be obtained. Moreover, when the second operation is performed in all round games, the number is 240 as in the case of FIG. 24(b).

Here, a player who wants to obtain the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out in each round game and to continue the round game until the final round is in a situation where the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is being executed. , for example, if the upper limit number of winning prizes in the second round is predicted to be eight, the player continues to perform the first operation until the fourth prize winning, which is the actual upper limit number of winning prizes. In this case, since the V prize does not occur in the round game of the second round, the round game of the third round is not executed. becomes). In this case, the total number of prize balls in the open/close execution mode remains at 15 prize balls×12 winning prizes=180, and the number of prize balls is smaller than when the second operation is performed in all round games.

However, if the opening/closing execution mode being executed in this case corresponds to the 16R jackpot result A, the opening/closing execution mode will not end in the second round, and 1920 pieces will be generated as described above. The possibility of obtaining the total number of prize balls increases. In other words, a player who has the courage to play the game with the aim of obtaining the maximum total number of prize balls can obtain a large profit if the prediction is correct, and conversely, if the prediction is wrong. However, the profit will remain small.

Also, when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed, the upper limit winning number of each round game is diversified also in this mode, and is set to each number shown in FIG. In this case, when the specific operation is performed in all round games, as shown in FIG. 24(d), 15 prize balls×95 wins=1425 total prize balls can be obtained. Moreover, when the second operation is performed in all round games, the number is 240 as in the case of FIGS. 24(b) and (c).

Also, a player who intends to obtain the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out in each round game and to continue the round game until the final round predicts, for example, that the upper limit number of winning balls in the second round is 8, and actually When the first operation is performed up to the second winning, which is the upper limit winning number of , the opening/closing execution mode ends when the round game of the second round ends. In this case, the total number of prize balls in the opening and closing execution mode remains at 15 prize balls x 10 prize winning = 150, and when the second operation is performed in all round games, opening and closing execution corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B When the mode is being executed, the number of prize balls is smaller than when the opening/closing execution mode ends in the second round.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in addition to the above operation modes, for example, the second operation is performed to win the second prize in each round game, or the first operation is performed to the third prize in a certain round game. , In other round games, it is possible to perform various operation modes such as performing the second operation up to the fourth ball. Even in these cases, there are variations in the number of prize balls paid out in each round game and how many rounds the opening and closing execution mode continues due to the relationship with the upper limit of the winning number of each time, and the total number of prize balls obtained by the opening and closing execution mode is different. will be.

With the configuration as described above, it is possible to predict the upper limit number of prizes to be won in each round game, and to select and enjoy at what timing the second operation is to be performed. . Therefore, the game during the opening/closing execution mode is preferably suppressed from being monotonous, and the game during the mode can be greatly excited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the opening and closing execution mode of 1, the first round game in which the upper limit number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 32 is the first number (for example, 8) (for example, the first round in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B round game), and a second round game in which the upper limit winning number to the variable winning device 32 is a second number (for example, 4) different from the first number (for example, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) 2nd round game).

According to the above configuration, since the maximum winning number of each round game is diversified, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the maximum winning number of each round game, and the game can be enjoyed by predicting the maximum winning number of each round game. can be provided. As a result, the monotony of the game during the opening/closing execution mode is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

When a predetermined condition (occurrence of V winning) is established during execution of a round game, a privilege (round continuation) is given, but the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit winning number. The configuration is such that the round game is terminated even in such a situation.

In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied early in the round game, the round game ends early, so the predetermined condition is satisfied at the timing when the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 occurs or at a timing close thereto. The case is ideal for the player, as the round game can be continued for a long time and the privilege can be obtained. In this case, since the maximum winning number of each round game is diversified, it is not uniform what number of winnings corresponds to the maximum winning number, and the ideal timing of establishment of the predetermined condition fluctuates. will be. For this reason, it is possible not only to predict the upper limit number of prizes to be won, but also to play a game expecting that a predetermined condition is established at an ideal timing. Therefore, each round game can be made much more interesting than the case where the round game is simply digested, and the game during the open/close execution mode can be greatly excited.

It is assumed that the predetermined condition can be established based on the player's operation. In this case, the player can be involved in the timing at which the predetermined condition is established. As a result, as compared with the case of only looking at whether or not a predetermined condition is established, it is possible to enhance the interest of each round game and to encourage active participation in the game.

When the game ball passes through the specific area (the detection area of the V winning sensor 507), the predetermined condition is established, and the game ball fired with strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 reaches a position where the game ball can reach the specific area. It was configured to place In this case, a predetermined condition can be established while a game ball is awarded to the variable winning device 32, and a game in the opening/closing execution mode and a game that satisfies the predetermined condition can be favorably compatible. As a result, for example, if a predetermined condition is to be established, the probability of winning a prize to the variable winning device 32 is lowered, while suppressing the game in the open/close execution mode from being spoiled, while the predetermined condition is being fulfilled during the execution of each round game. It becomes possible to add a game to be established.

In addition, the specific area is arranged in the variable winning device 32 . In this case, the points of interest of the player are aggregated, and both whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 32 and whether or not a predetermined condition has been established (whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area) are determined. can be visually recognized without moving the line of sight. As a result, it is possible to prevent overlooking whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable prize winning device 32 or the specific area, thereby making it easier for the player to play the game.

Inside the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, a right entrance portion 504 through which the game ball passes through the specific area and a left entrance portion 505 in which the game ball does not pass through the specific area are provided. The game ball fired by the operation of shooting the game ball with the above strength) can enter the right entrance portion 504, and is shot by the second shooting operation (the operation of shooting the game ball with the strength of less than a predetermined amount). A guide passage part 401 is provided for guiding the game ball so that the game ball can enter the left entrance part 505.例文帳に追加

According to this configuration, since it is possible to determine whether or not to pass the game ball through the specific area, the player can determine the timing at which the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the player predicts the upper limit winning number and establishes the predetermined condition by himself at the timing corresponding to the prediction result. In such a game, if the timing at which the player satisfies the predetermined condition is early in terms of the actual maximum number of winning prizes, the round game ends early, although a privilege is obtained. Conversely, if the timing at which the predetermined condition is met is late in terms of the actual maximum number of winning prizes, the round game ends without obtaining any benefit. In this way, since the profit obtained in the round game changes according to the player's prediction result, the fun of playing the game by predicting the upper limit number of prizes won in each round game is preferably enhanced, and the interest of the open/close execution mode is increased. can be greatly improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball fired by the first shooting operation easily enters the right entrance portion 504, and the game ball launched by the second shooting operation easily enters the left entrance portion 505 ( Although it is not impossible to enter the right entrance portion 504, it may be difficult to enter the right entrance portion 504 compared to the case of the first shooting operation).

As the provision of the privilege, the round game next to the round game in which the predetermined condition is established is executed. While the player can determine the timing at which the predetermined condition is established by determining whether the game ball is passed through the specific area or not, if the predetermined condition is established at an early timing by prioritizing the continuation of the round, opening and closing will occur. Even if the run mode can be completed, the total number of prize balls to be obtained is reduced. On the other hand, if the timing at which the predetermined condition is established is extended to the last minute in order to increase the number of prize balls in one round of the round game, the opening/closing execution mode ends prematurely. In other words, it is possible to realize a game like a so-called chicken race in which courage is tested after predicting the maximum winning number of each round game, and it is possible to provide a highly entertaining opening and closing execution mode.

A configuration is adopted in which the upper limit winning number of each round game is not notified. In this case, coupled with the diversification of the maximum winning number of each round game, it is possible for the player to make it impossible or difficult to determine the maximum winning number of each round game, and the maximum winning number can be predicted. It becomes possible to enhance the game to be played.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit winning number is not reported for all round games executed in the open/close execution mode, but the upper limit winning number may not be reported only for some round games. This is because, even in this case, the game in which the maximum winning number is predicted is secured in the round game in which the maximum winning number is not notified.

By the way, in the present embodiment, since the special figure stop result (stop result A to stop result C) in the special figure display unit 43 and the upper limit winning number of each round game are made to correspond, the special figure display unit 43 It is also possible to determine the upper limit winning number of each round game by referring to the stop result stopped and displayed. In this sense, it can be said that the specific notification that allows the player to recognize the upper limit winning number of each round game is performed.

However, the specific notification based on the stop result does not directly notify the maximum winning number, but only indirectly. Therefore, anyone can easily find out the upper limit number of prizes to be won, and the game to be enjoyed by predicting the upper limit number of prizes to be won in each round game is not excessively hindered. In particular, it is possible to determine the maximum winning number from the stop result only when the player fully understands the correspondence between the type of stop result and the maximum winning number for each round game. This provides an opportunity for players to deepen their interest in and knowledge of the pachinko machine 10, which in turn can lead to arousal of their willingness to play.

In addition, such a configuration can effectively function as an anti-fraud measure. For example, when a fraudulent act such as operating the pachinko machine 10 with an upper limit winning number different from the normally set upper limit winning number is performed, an employee of the game hall displays the stop result of the special figure display unit 43. By visually checking, it is possible to determine whether the upper limit number of winning prizes does not match. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the early detection of fraud.

<Second Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the player can recognize the maximum winning number of each round game. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 31. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Effect processing for open/close execution mode>
First, the opening/closing execution mode effect processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is for executing the game effect in the opening/closing execution mode, and is executed as part of the regular process started by the MPU 242 every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

In the opening/closing execution mode effect processing, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether an opening command has been received as a transmission command from the main control device 81 or not. As already explained, the command received from the main controller 81 is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 244. In this step, it is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the opening command is stored in the command storage area. The above determination is made by checking.

If an opening command has been received, the process advances to step S1102 to execute opening effect setting processing. In this step, various devices are controlled so that the opening effect is executed. After execution of step S1102, the opening/closing execution mode effect processing is terminated.

If the opening command has not been received, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not it is time to start the round game. Although the method of determining whether or not it is the start timing of the round game is not particularly limited, for example, the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 such as setting processing for each round (FIG. 20) determines the start timing of the round game. In the process to be executed, a process for setting a round start command indicating the start of the round game is provided, and in this step, the above determination can be performed by confirming whether or not it is time to receive the round start command. can. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the number of opening times of the variable winning device 32 is one in one round game, the opening command set in step S606 of FIG. 18 may be substituted for the round start command.

If it is the start timing of the round game, the process proceeds to step S1104, and a round start process is executed in accordance with the start timing of the round game. After execution of step S1104, the opening/closing execution mode effect processing is terminated. The details of the round start processing will be described later.

When it is not the start timing of the round game, in step S1105, it is determined whether or not the round game is in progress. Whether or not the round game is being played is determined after receiving the round start command or the open command and before receiving the round end command or the closing command, which will be described later. ,It can be carried out. When the round game is being played, the process for the round is executed in step S1106, and then the effect process for the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Details of the mid-round processing will be described later.

If the round game is not in progress, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not it is time to end the round. For example, a process for setting a round end command indicating the end of the round game is provided immediately after step S619 in FIG. It can be determined whether or not it is time. Note that the close command may be substituted for the round end command. If it is the round end timing, the round end processing is executed in step S1108, and then the opening/closing execution mode effect processing is ended. The details of the round end processing will be described later.

If it is not the round end timing, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not it is during the waiting period (round interval) between rounds. If it is during the standby period, the process for the standby period is executed in step S1110, and then the effect process for the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Details of the standby period processing will be described later.

If it is not during the standby period, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received as a transmission command from the main controller 81 in step S1111. When the ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1112, and various devices are controlled so that the ending effect is executed. After execution of step S1112 or when a negative determination is made in step S1111, the opening/closing execution mode effect processing is terminated.

Next, the standby period processing in step S1110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the waiting period process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the waiting period is the first round to the 14th round. In addition, the waiting period of the first round is a waiting period provided immediately after the round game of the first round, in other words, the waiting period between the round game of the first round and the round game of the second round. is. Determination of what round the waiting period is can be determined based on the result of counting the number of rounds independently on the production control device 82 side based on the reception of the round start command or the release command. can. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which includes the information of which round game it is in the said round start command etc., and judges by analyzing the said command.

When it is determined that it is the waiting period of the 1st to 14th rounds, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not it is time to start the first effect DR1. Here, the first effect DR1 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(a). The first effect DR1 is a effect for informing a task (goal) to be achieved by the player in the next round game. In the present embodiment, based on the diversification of the maximum winning number of each round game in the open/close execution mode, the V winning is determined by the winning of the maximum winning number to the variable winning device 32 in the next round game. The above problem is to generate it. In the first effect DR1, for example, a character image 601 imitating a god is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, along with a message image 602 displaying characters such as "Let me win the V prize with the upper limit number." Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, determination of whether or not it is the waiting period of the 1st to 14th rounds and determination of whether or not it is time to start the first effect DR1 are performed separately. If the first effect DR1 is started at the start timing of the waiting period, the process of step S1202 may be omitted.

When it is determined in step S1202 that it is time to start the first effect DR1, the process advances to step S1203 to determine whether a success flag is stored in various flag storage areas provided in the RAM 244 or not. The success flag is a flag indicating that the task notified by the first effect DR1 has been achieved.

When the success flag is not stored, in step S1204, setting processing for executing the first effect DR1 is executed. In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the first effect DR1 or information designating the first effect DR1 is output to the display control device 212 . The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the first effect DR1 from the character ROM 276, and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. . Further, in step S1204, the audio data for the first effect DR1 and the illumination data stored in the ROM 243 are read out, for example, a sound corresponding to the display content of the message image 602 is output, or the first effect DR1 is output. The speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the light emitting effect for the purpose is performed.

If it is determined in step S1201 that it is not the waiting period of the 1st round to the 14th round, that is, if it is the waiting period of the 15th round, the process proceeds to step S1205, and a normal waiting period different from the first effect DR1 It outputs a command to the display control device 212 and drives and controls the speaker section 64 and the light emitting section 63 so that the effect is executed. Moreover, also when it determines with the success flag being stored in step S1203, it progresses to step S1205 and performs the process which sets the production|presentation for normal waiting periods. In addition, in the normal waiting period effect, the above-mentioned problem is not notified unlike the first effect DR1.

After execution of step S1204 or step S1205, or when it is determined in step S1202 that it is not the start timing of the first effect DR1, the waiting period processing is ended.

Next, the round start processing in step S1104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the round start processing, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the round game to be started is the first round game or the final round game in the opening/closing execution mode. When it is determined that the round game is the first round game or the final round game, the normal round effect setting process is executed in step S1302. In step S1302, a command is output to the display control device 212, and driving control of the speaker section 64 and the light emitting section 63 is performed so that a normal round effect is executed.

When it is determined in step S1301 that the round game is not the first round game or the final round game, in step S1303, a process of grasping the upper limit winning number of the round game to be started is executed. Although the method for grasping the upper limit number of winning prizes is not particularly limited, for example, table information similar to the upper limit number apportionment table of FIG. The upper limit winning number can be grasped based on the type command (command indicating the sorted jackpot type) and the grasp result of what round the round game is. Further, when the round start command is transmitted, the command may include information indicating the upper limit number of winning prizes. may be configured to transmit. In this step, the information of the grasped upper limit winning number is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 244 .

In the subsequent step S1304, it is determined whether or not a success flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. FIG. If the success flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1305 to set the first effect DR1 to be continuously executed. That is, the various devices are controlled so that the first effect DR1 executed in the immediately preceding standby period is continued to be executed even after the start of the round game.

In addition, in the first effect DR1 during the round game, as shown in FIG. 30(a), a round display 600 is performed to notify what round the round game being executed is. Further, this round display 600 is also performed in the normal round effect.

If the success flag is stored in step S1304, the process of step S1306 is executed. Before explaining this process, the mid-round process of step S1106 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the mid-round process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main controller 81. FIG. If a winning command has been received, the process advances to step S1402 to update the value of the winning counter SPC by adding 1 to it. The winning counter SPC is for the effect control device 82 to grasp the winning number of game balls to the variable winning device 32, and a storage area for storing the value is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 244.

In the subsequent step S1403, it is determined whether or not a success flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. FIG. If the success flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1404 to determine whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main controller 81, that is, whether or not a V winning has occurred. When the V winning command has been received, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the value of the winning counter SPC at that time coincides with the maximum number of winning prizes ascertained in step S1303.

When both values match, a success flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in step S1406, and then, in step S1407, setting processing for executing the second effect DR2 is executed. Here, the second effect DR2 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(b). The second effect DR2 is a effect for notifying that the task presented in the first effect DR1 has been achieved. In the second effect DR2, a character image 601 imitating a god is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 along with a message image 603 displaying characters such as "Excellent! Let's give a reward!" .

In step S1407, a command including information indicating the display content of the second effect DR2 or information designating the second effect DR2 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the second effect DR2 from the character ROM 276, and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. . Further, in step S1407, the voice data for the second effect DR2 and the data for electric decoration stored in the ROM 243 are read out, for example, the voice corresponding to the display content of the message image 603 is output, or the second effect DR2 is output. The speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the light emitting effect for the purpose is performed.

After execution of step S1407, if a negative determination is made in step S1401 (if the winning command has not been received), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1403 (if a success flag is stored), if a negative determination is made in step S1404 ( If the V winning command has not been received) or if a negative determination is made in step S1405 (if the value of the winning counter SPC does not match the maximum number of winnings), the mid-round processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the round start processing (FIG. 27), when it is determined that the success flag is stored in step S1304, in step S1306, a successful round effect is performed as a round effect in the round game to be started. Set DR4. Successful round effect DR4 is implemented in the next round game when the task presented in the first effect DR1 is achieved. In the successful round effect DR4, as shown in FIG. 30(d), a specific image 604 is displayed to notify the maximum winning number of the round game. In the specific image 604, in addition to an upper limit number image 604a indicating the upper limit winning number, a winning number image 604b indicating the winning number to the variable winning device 32 at that time is displayed.

In step S1306, a command including information indicating the display content of the successful round effect DR4 or information designating the second effect DR2 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the effect DR4 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. In addition, in step S1306, the sound data for the effect DR4 and the data for electric decoration stored in the ROM 243 are read, and the speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are controlled so that the sound effect and the light effect for the effect DR4 are performed. drive control.

After execution of step S1306, step S1302, or step S1305, the round start processing ends.

Next, the round end processing in step S1108 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the round end processing, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a success flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 . Since the round end processing is executed at the end of the round game, this step determines whether or not the round game has ended without completing the task. The case where the task is not achieved corresponds to the case where a V prize is generated in a prize different from the upper limit prize number, or the case where the V prize is not generated during the round game.

When the success flag is not stored (when the task is not achieved), the process advances to step S1502 to execute setting processing for executing the third effect DR3. Here, the third effect DR3 will be described with reference to FIG. 30(c). The third effect DR3 is a effect for notifying that the challenge to the task presented in the first effect DR1 has failed. In the third effect DR3, a character image 605 with an angry expression is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 along with a message image 606 displaying characters such as "Come back!"

In step S1502, a command including information indicating the display content of the third effect DR3 or information designating the third effect DR3 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the third effect DR3 from the character ROM 276, and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. . Further, in step S1502, the voice data for the third effect DR3 and the illumination data stored in the ROM 243 are read out, for example, the voice corresponding to the display content of the message image 606 is output, or the third effect DR3 is output. The speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the light emitting effect for the purpose is performed.

After step S1502 is executed, the process advances to step S1503 to set the value of the winning counter SPC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 244 to "0". In the subsequent step S1504, the information on the maximum winning number stored in the RAM 244 in step S1303 of the round start process (FIG. 27) is erased, and then the round end process is terminated.

Moreover, when affirmative determination is made in the above step S1501 (when the success flag is stored), it is determined whether or not the round game to end is the final round game. If it is the final round game, the process proceeds to step S1506, and the success flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 are erased. That is, since the success flag continues to be stored until the final round game, if the task is achieved in one of the round games in the opening and closing execution mode, not only the next round game but also the subsequent round game , the upper limit number of winning prizes is continuously reported. Although illustration is omitted, even if the round does not continue while the upper limit winning number is notified and the open/close execution mode ends in the middle, the last round game ends at the end timing. Clear the success flag.

After execution of step S1506 or when a negative determination is made in step S1505 (when it is not the final round game), the process advances to step S1503 to execute a process of setting "0" to the winning counter SPC.

<Regarding the flow of the game production during the opening and closing execution mode>
Next, the flow of the game presentation during the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. Here, it is assumed that the first effect DR1 is started at the start of the waiting period between rounds.

When the waiting period of the first round starts at timing t1, the first effect DR1 is executed. In the first effect DR1, for example, a message image 602 displaying characters such as "Let's win V prizes in the upper limit number" is displayed, and the player is prompted to win the upper limit number of prizes in the second round of the round game. , it is notified that a V prize should be generated.

As described in the first embodiment, since the player cannot or cannot determine the upper limit winning number of the round game in the second round, it is difficult for the player to determine the number of winning prizes in the second round. The game is played by predicting the maximum winning number.

For example, in the second round of the round game, if the maximum winning number predicted by the player is less than the actual maximum winning number, and V winning occurs with a winning less than the maximum winning number, the round game The third effect DR3 is executed at the timing t2, which is the end timing (in other words, the V winning generation timing). In the third effect DR3, for example, a message image 606 displaying characters such as "Come back!" is displayed to notify failure of the challenge. After the third performance DR3 is performed for a predetermined period, the first performance DR1 is performed again, and it is reported that V winning should be generated in the winning of the upper limit winning number in the round game of the third round.

For example, in the third round of the round game, when the maximum winning number predicted by the player matches the actual maximum winning number, and V winning occurs in the winning of the maximum winning number, the round game ends. The second effect DR2 is executed at the timing (timing t3). In the second effect DR2, for example, a message image 603 displaying characters such as "Stunning!! Let's give a reward" is displayed to notify success of the challenge.

After that, at the start timing (timing t4) of the fourth round round game, the successful round effect DR4 is executed. In the successful round effect DR4, a specific image 604 is displayed for notifying the upper limit winning number of the round game. This specific image 604 is continuously displayed until the round game ends. Also, in the next round game, the successful round effect DR4 is executed, and a specific image 604 for informing the upper limit winning number of the round game is displayed. That is, once the challenge is successful, the upper limit winning number of each round game is reported in subsequent round games. Therefore, the player can know the maximum winning number of each round game by looking at the specific image 604, and can proceed with the game more advantageously than when the specific image 604 is not displayed due to failure in the challenge. Become.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

Under the configuration in which the maximum winning number of each round game is diversified, the maximum winning number is notified by establishing a predetermined condition (achievement of a task). When such notification is made, the player can proceed with the game more advantageously than in the case where the game is played by predicting the upper limit number of winning prizes. Therefore, it is possible to add interest in playing a game aiming at the establishment of a predetermined condition, and it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game in the opening/closing execution mode.

The configuration is such that the predetermined condition can be established during the opening/closing execution mode. According to this configuration, in the opening/closing execution mode, not only the game in which the variable winning device 32 wins the game ball to win the prize ball, but also the game in which the predetermined condition is established in the opening/closing execution mode and the notification is executed is provided. be able to. As a result, the game during the opening/closing execution mode can be more preferably livened up.

The predetermined condition is established when the game ball passes through a specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) provided in the variable winning device 32. FIG. In this case, a predetermined condition can be established while a game ball is awarded to the variable winning device 32, and a game in the opening/closing execution mode and a game that satisfies the predetermined condition can be favorably compatible. As a result, for example, if a predetermined condition is to be established, the probability of winning a prize to the variable winning device 32 is lowered, while suppressing the game in the open/close execution mode from being spoiled, while the predetermined condition is being fulfilled during the execution of each round game. It becomes possible to add a game to be established.

The predetermined condition is satisfied when the upper limit number of winning balls pass through the specific area. Since the upper limit winning number of each round game is diversified, it is not easy to let the game ball pass through the specific area at the winning of the upper limit winning number, and the degree of difficulty of establishing the predetermined condition can be increased. For example, if the degree of difficulty in fulfilling the predetermined condition is low and the notification is easy, there is a possibility that the significance of diversifying the maximum number of winning prizes and allowing the player to predict them may be lost. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the difficulty level is increased, a situation in which the notification is not achieved occurs with a certain frequency. can be suitably harmonized with.

The configuration is such that the maximum winning number is notified during the opening/closing execution mode. Since the maximum winning number of each round game is diversified and the maximum winning number of each round game is notified in real time, it is possible to make a beneficial notification for the player, and increase the interest in the notification. can be increased.

In that case, the configuration is such that the maximum number of winning prizes is notified using the waiting period between rounds. Since the variable prize winning device 32 is in the closed state during the standby period, the player can see the notification without being distracted by whether or not the game ball wins the variable prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the notification of the upper limit number of prizes to be won, so that the player can easily grasp the upper limit number of prizes to be won for each round game through the notification.

When a predetermined condition is established in any round game in the opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit winning number is reported for the round game for a plurality of rounds to be executed after the round game. In this case, the earlier the predetermined condition is satisfied in the open/close execution mode, the more the upper limit number of winning prizes can be known for more round games. As a result, it is possible to impart the enjoyment of playing the game with the aim of satisfying the predetermined condition as soon as possible, and it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the upper limit number of winning prizes is notified from the round game next to the round game in which the predetermined condition is established. In order to notify, it may be configured to notify the upper limit winning number for the round game after the round in which the predetermined condition is established.

In addition, as described in the first embodiment, the display of the special figure stop result (stop result A to stop result C) in the special figure display unit 43 is specified so that the player can recognize the upper limit number of winning prizes. It also works as a notification. In such a sense, the present embodiment is the first specific notification by the stop result that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43, and the success round production DR4 (specific image 604) that is displayed on the display screen G It can be said that both the second specific notification (the notification that allows the player to more easily recognize the upper limit winning number than the first specific notification) are performed.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is different from that in each of the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 45. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the passage structure of the variable winning device 32 according to this embodiment. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the passage portion provided behind the right inlet portion 504 . Other configurations of the variable prize winning device 32 are the same as those of the first embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32 , a right longitudinal passage portion 701 extending vertically is provided behind the right entrance portion 504 . The right vertical passage portion 701 communicates with the passage portion 502 (FIG. 7(a)), and the game balls that have entered the right entrance portion 504 out of the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 32a (FIG. 6(b)) down. A winning sensor 702 for detecting a game ball entering the right inlet 504 is arranged in the middle of the right vertical passage 701 . The winning sensor 702 detects only whether or not a game ball enters the big winning opening 32a, similarly to the winning sensor 509 according to the first embodiment.

A fall prize sensor 703 is arranged downstream of the prize prize sensor 702 in the right vertical passage portion 701 . Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery mode is configured to shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode based on the game ball that has won the big prize opening 32a passing the falling prize sensor 703. ing. In other words, the fall winning sensor 703 or its arrangement area is a specific area that triggers the fall from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

A branch passage portion 704 branching from the right vertical passage portion 701 is provided at an intermediate portion between the prize winning sensor 702 and the falling prize winning sensor 703 in the right vertical passage portion 701 . A V prize sensor 705 is arranged in the middle of the branch passage portion 704 . Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, on the condition that the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 705 (occurrence of V winning) during the execution of one round game, the next A round game is configured to be executed. In addition, unlike the V winning sensor 705 according to the first embodiment, the V winning sensor 705 does not play the role of detecting whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 32a, and only the V winning occurs. is detected.

The winning sensor 702, the falling winning sensor 703 and the V winning sensor 705 are electrically connected to the main controller 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of each winning sensor 702, 703, 705, a predetermined Detection information (detection signal) is input to main controller 81 . Based on this detection information, the main controller 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning sensors 702 , 703 , 705 . When the passage of the game ball to the prize winning sensor 702 is grasped by the main control device 81, the prize ball is paid out. No prize balls will be paid out. Also, hereinafter, the arrangement area of the falling prize sensor 703 or its detection area may be referred to as a falling area 703a.

The passage widths of the right vertical passage portion 701 and the branch passage portion 704 are larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is a row ball passage. In addition, the game balls that have flowed down these passages 701 and 704 and passed through the winning sensors 702, 703 and 705 are led to the discharge passage board 88 (FIG. 3) and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. .

A shutter 706 is arranged above the falling prize sensor 703 so as to cover the falling prize sensor 703 from above. The shutter 706 is held so as to be slidable in the width direction of the right vertical passage portion 701 (specifically, in the longitudinal direction). That is, the shutter 706 has a protruding position (advance position) that protrudes into the right vertical passage portion 701 and a retracted position (backward position) that retracts rearward from the protruding position and suppresses the amount of protrusion into the right longitudinal passage portion 701. ) and can be displaced.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), when the shutter 706 is arranged at the protruding position, the shutter 706 blocks the flow path to the falling region 703a. As a result, the falling area 703 a is closed, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 cannot pass through the falling prize sensor 703 . The game ball whose inflow into the falling area 703a is restricted by the shutter 706 contacts the upper surface portion 706a of the shutter 706, is guided to the branch passage portion 704, and passes through the V prize sensor 705.

The upper surface portion 706a of the shutter 706 is an inclined surface that descends toward the branch passage portion 704, so that the game ball can be guided to the branch passage portion 704 satisfactorily. The height position of the shutter 706 is a height position that does not hinder the flow of the game ball to the branch passage portion 704 in a state where the shutter 706 is arranged at the projecting position. It is set at a height position not formed between the portion 706 a and the branch passage portion 704 . In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion 706a is inclined at substantially the same inclination angle as the branch passage portion 704, and the upper surface portion 706a and the branch passage portion 704 are set at a height position where a substantially straight spherical passage is formed. there is

As shown in FIG. 32(b), when the shutter 706 is arranged at the retracted position, the shutter 706 retracts from above the fall area 703a, and the area 703a is opened upward. As a result, the falling area 703 a is opened, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 can pass the falling prize sensor 703 .

In this embodiment, when the falling area 703a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot pass through the falling winning prize sensor 703, but it may be possible to pass in a range where it is difficult to pass through compared to the open state. The point is that the easiness of passage of the falling prize sensor 703 should be different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

A front region of the passage structure is a light transmission region, and game balls flowing through the passage structure can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加It should be noted that the entire passage structure does not necessarily have to be visible, and at least the shutter 706 (distribution of game balls) and the V winning sensor 705 (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the V winning sensor 705). is visible.

The variable winning device 32 is provided with a shutter driving section 707 for driving the shutter 706 . The drive unit 707 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the solenoid to the shutter 706 . The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . By driving the solenoid, the shutter 706 is retracted from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the fall region 703a is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 81 stops, the shutter 706 advances from the retracted position to the projecting position by the biasing force of the biasing means (such as a spring), and the falling area 703a switches from the open state to the closed state.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed in place of the timer interrupt process of FIG. In FIG. 33, the same step numbers are given to the same processing as those in FIG. 13, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the V winning process in step S106, the fall winning process is executed in step S1601. After executing the falling prize process, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, the falling winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the fall winning process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a fall flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. If the fall flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1702, and whether a fall prize has occurred based on the detection state of the fall prize sensor 703 provided in the variable prize winning device 32 (the reading result of various sensors in step S101). It is determined whether or not (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the falling prize sensor 703).

If it is determined that a falling prize has occurred, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the falling prize is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period that is determined in anticipation of a period during which a normal falling win can occur. For example, the open period of the shutter 706 is set as the valid period. If it is determined that it is not within the effective period, the process proceeds to step S1704, an error command is set as an abnormality has occurred, and then the fall winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 14), and the effect control device 82 performs the predetermined error notification so that the display control device 212, the light emission It controls the unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the effective period, the flow advances to step S1705 to store the fall flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. In the following step S1706, a falling prize command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The falling winning command is a command for notifying the production control device 82 that a falling winning has occurred. sent. The performance control device 82 grasps that the falling prize has occurred by receiving the falling prize command. After execution of step S1706, if affirmative determination is made in step S1701 (if the fall flag is stored) or if negative determination is made in step S1702 (if no fall prize has occurred), the fall prize processing is terminated. do.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the normal process of FIG. In FIG. 35, the same step numbers are given to the same processing as those in FIG. 14, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the electric support processing in step S205, the shutter driving processing for driving and controlling the shutter 706 is executed in step S1801. The details of the shutter driving process will be described later. After executing step S1801, the process advances to step S206 to execute a game ball launch control process for controlling the launch of a game ball.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S510 (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the big winning opening opening/closing process of FIG.

In the big winning opening opening/closing process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the round game is being executed. Whether or not the round game is being executed is determined by determining whether or not a round flag, which will be described later, is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. FIG.

If the round game is not being executed, the process advances to step S1903 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". When the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, a setting process for each round is executed to set the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 and the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in each round game in the open/close execution mode.

Here, setting processing for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "16". That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be set is the first round of the open/close execution mode. When the value of the round counter RC is not "16", that is, when the round game to be set is the round game after the second round, in step S2102, the continuation stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. Clear the flag. The continuation flag is the same as the continuation flag according to the first embodiment.

After execution of step S2102 or when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101 (when the value of the round counter RC is "16"), in step S2103, the jackpot type flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 Based on this, the jackpot type corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode being executed or being executed is grasped. For example, when the 16R jackpot A flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e, the 16R jackpot result A is grasped as the jackpot type corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. Also, in this step, based on the value of the round counter RC, it is grasped what round the round game to be set (the round game to be started from now) is.

In the following step S2104, the upper limit number distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the upper limit winning number for the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set.

Here, the upper limit allocation table will be described with reference to FIG. 38(a). In the upper limit allocation table, the upper limit winning number of each round game is defined for each jackpot type. The upper limit winning number of each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is 8 for any round game, and is unified between rounds. The upper limit winning number of each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is 8 in any round game up to the 10th round, as in the case of the 16R jackpot result A, but after the 11th round, any number A round game is also counted as one. The upper limit winning number of each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is 8 in any round game up to the 5th round, but is 1 in any round game after the 6th round. .

It should be noted that the specific upper limit number of prizes shown in FIG. 38 is merely an example, and the numbers are not limited to these numbers. For example, for a round game with an upper limit winning number of 8, the upper limit winning number may be 10, and for a round game with a maximum winning number of 1, the upper limit winning number may be 2.

Returning to the description of the setting process for each round (FIG. 37), in step S2104, the result of grasping whether the round game of the jackpot type and setting target in step S2103 is the round game of what round, and the upper limit numbering Based on the minute table, the corresponding maximum winning number is derived. In the following step S2105, a value corresponding to the above derived upper limit winning number is set as the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. For example, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot result C, the round game to be set is the 6th round round game, and the derived upper limit winning number is 1, the value of the winning counter PC is "1 ”.

In the subsequent step S2106, the open/close pattern table stored in the allocation table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the number of opening times of the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set.

Here, the opening/closing pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. 38(b). In the opening/closing pattern table, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in each round game is defined for each jackpot type. The number of opening times of each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is 8 times for any round game, which is uniform between rounds. The number of opening times of each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is set to 8 for each round game up to the 10th round as in the case of the 16R jackpot result A, but from the 11th round onwards, any round is set. A game is also counted as one time. The number of opening times of each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is 8 times for each round game up to the 5th round, but is 1 time for each round game after the 6th round.

The processing for setting the open period for each opening will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the open period is set to 1 sec for any opening. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is opened 8 times in one round game and when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in one round game, the opening period (opening mode) of each opening is set to be the same. there is Therefore, when the variable prize winning device 32 is opened 8 times, the player will not know whether it is due to 8 rounds of round games or 1 round of round games. It is visually indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish. Therefore, the player plays a game by predicting what round the current round game is during execution of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the above characteristics function more effectively, it is configured not to notify what round the round game is being executed or started during the opening and closing execution mode.

When comparing the opening/closing pattern table of FIG. 38(b) and the upper limit allocation table of FIG. 38(a), the number of opening times of each round game and the upper limit winning number of each round game are the same number. Under the assumption that one game ball wins in the variable winning device 32 by opening for 1 sec, the number of times of opening is set according to the upper limit winning number. It should be noted that the number of opening times of each round game is not limited to the number shown in FIG.

Returning to the description of the setting process for each round (FIG. 37), in step S2106, the result of grasping what round the round game of the big hit type and setting target in step S2103 is the round game, and the opening and closing pattern table and the corresponding number of times of opening is derived. In subsequent step S2107, a value corresponding to the above derived number of times of opening is set as the value of the opening counter OC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. For example, when the jackpot type is the 16R jackpot result C, the round game to be set is the 6th round game, and the derived number of times of opening is 1, the value of the opening counter OC is "1". set.

In the subsequent step S2108, the round flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and then the setting process for each round ends. A round flag is a flag indicating that a round game is being executed.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 36), after executing the setting process for each round in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905 to set the opening period of the variable winning device 32. FIG. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "500" corresponding to the open period (1 sec) for one open.

In the subsequent step S1906, a large winning opening opening process for switching the variable winning device 32 from the closed state to the open state is executed. After execution of step S1907, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901 (when the value of the round counter RC is "0") or a negative determination is made in step S1903 (when the value of the timer counter T is not "0") , ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1902 (when the round game is being executed), the process proceeds to step S1908, and it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 32a is being opened (the variable winning device 32 is in an open state). . When the big winning hole 32a is being opened, a process for opening is executed in step S1909, and then the big winning hole opening/closing process is ended. The open process is a process of determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 has won a prize, and controlling the switching timing of the variable winning device 32 to the closed state.

Here, the open-during processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the open operation process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". This process determines whether or not the open period set in step S1905 (FIG. 36) has passed. If the value of the timer counter T is "0" (if the open period has elapsed), the process advances to step S2202 to decrement the value of the open counter OC by 1 and update it.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (if the open period has not passed), in step S2203, the detection state of the prize winning sensors 509 and 702 (the reading result of various sensors in step S101) Based on this, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the variable prize winning device 32 . When a prize is won to the variable prize winning device 32, the process proceeds to step S2204, and the value of the prize counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is decremented by one.

After execution of step S2204 or when a negative determination is made in step S2203 (when no prize has been awarded to the variable prize winning device 32), the V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2205. Determine whether or not The V winning flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the detection area of the V winning sensor 705, ie, that the V winning has occurred.

If the V winning flag is stored, the process advances to step S2206 to erase the V winning flag stored in the various flags storage area 114e of the RAM 114 and set the continuation flag to the various flags storage area 114e. The continuation flag is a flag indicating that the next round game should be executed, in other words, the open/close execution mode should be continued even after the round game being executed is finished.

After execution of step S2206 or when a negative determination is made in step S2205 (when the V winning flag is not stored), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" in step S2207. When it is determined that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0", that is, when the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 has not reached the upper limit number of winnings, the open processing is ended.

In the first embodiment, when it is determined that the V winning flag is stored, the value of the winning counter PC is set to "0" (step S612 in FIG. 18). , shall not do this. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not V winning occurs during the round game, the number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit, or the opening period of the variable winning device 32 is opened to the upper limit. The round game is continued until the period (the product of the number of times of opening and the opening period of each opening) is reached.

If the determination in step S2207 is affirmative (if the value of the winning counter PC is "0"), the value of the open counter OC is set to "0" in step S2208. After execution of step S2208 or step S2202 (updating process of open counter OC), in step S2209, a large winning opening closing process for switching the variable winning device 32 from the open state to the closed state is executed. In subsequent step S2210, it is determined whether or not the value of the open counter OC is "0". If the value of the open counter OC is not "0", the value of the timer counter T is set to "1000" (1 sec) in step S2211. This process sets a waiting period between openings during a round game (a period of waiting for the next opening with the variable winning device 32 closed).

After the execution of step S2211 or when the affirmative determination is made in step S2210 (when the value of the open counter OC is "0"), the closing command is set as a transmission command to the effect control device 82, and then, during opening End the process.

Returning to the explanation of the large winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 36), if a negative determination is made in step S1908 (when the large winning opening 32a is not open), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the value of the open counter OC is "0". Determine whether or not there is When the value of the open counter OC is "0", in step S1911, round update or ending start processing is executed.

Here, the round update or ending start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. If the continuation flag is stored, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1 in step S2402, and the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode is updated.

In the subsequent step S2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process advances to step S2404 to set the value of the timer counter T to "1000" corresponding to the waiting period (2 sec) between rounds. set to

Here, in the present embodiment, the waiting period between round games is the same length as the waiting period between openings during the round game. Therefore, when the variable prize winning device 32 is closed during the open/close execution mode, whether it is due to the waiting period between rounds or the waiting period between each opening during the round game is determined. It becomes impossible or difficult to distinguish from the player's point of view. As a result, since the boundaries between rounds are not known or are difficult to understand, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the characteristic of playing by predicting what round the current round game is during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. be able to.

In this case, the same game effect is performed in the waiting period between rounds and the waiting period between each release (specifically, the display image such as the background image displayed on the display screen G is the same image, or the light emitting unit 63 and the output sound from the speaker unit 64 may be made the same). This makes it more difficult to determine whether it is the waiting period between rounds or the waiting period between openings during the round game.

In continuing step S2405, a round update command is set as a transmission command to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. FIG. Effect control device 82 grasps that the next round game is started by receiving the round update command. Next, in step S2406, the round flags stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 are erased, and then the round update or ending start processing is terminated.

If the determination in step S2403 is affirmative (if the value of the round counter RC is "0"), the process advances to step S2407 to execute ending start processing. In the start process, an ending waiting period is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the timer counter T is set with waiting period information for the ending pre-stored in the ROM 113 . After that, in step S2408, an ending command is set, and the round updating or ending start processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401 (the continuation flag is not stored), the process advances to step S2409 to set the value of the round counter RC to "0" to end the open/close execution mode. After that, the flow advances to step S2407 to execute ending start processing and ending command setting processing (step S2408), and end the round update or ending start processing.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 36), if a negative determination is made in step S1910 (if the value of the opening counter OC is not "0"), it means that there are remaining openings in the round game. In this case, the process advances to step S1912 to determine whether the value of the timer counter T is "0". This process determines whether or not the waiting period between openings set in step S2211 (FIG. 39) has passed.

When the value of the timer counter T is "0" (when the waiting period between openings has elapsed), the process advances to step S1905 to set the opening period for the next opening. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (if the waiting period between openings has not elapsed), the round update or ending start processing is terminated.

<Shutter drive processing>
Next, the shutter drive processing in step S1801 (FIG. 35) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41(a).

In the shutter driving process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the shutter 706 (FIG. 32) is being opened, that is, whether or not the shutter 706 is arranged at the retracted position. When the shutter 706 is not opened and the falling area 703a (FIG. 32) is closed, the process proceeds to step S2502, and the variable winning device 32 is entered in the final (16th round) round game. It is determined whether or not the winning of the upper limit number of winnings has occurred. In the present embodiment, the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is opened at the timing when the game ball that becomes the upper limit winning number in the final round game passes either the winning sensor 509 or the winning sensor 702. , this step determines whether or not it is time to open the shutter 706 .

When the winning of the upper limit number of winnings occurs in the final round game, the opening period of the shutter 706 is set in step S2503. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "1000" (1 sec). As shown in FIG. 41(b), the open period of the shutter 706 (period from timing t1 to timing t2) is set to be shorter than the ending period (period from timing t1 to timing t3).

In the subsequent step S2504, the drive unit 707 is brought into a driving state to open the shutter 706 (to displace the shutter 706 from the projecting position to the retracted position). After that, the shutter driving process is terminated.

If the determination in step S2501 is affirmative (if the shutter 706 is open), the process advances to step S2505 to determine whether the value of the timer counter T2 is "0". This process determines whether or not the open period of the shutter 706 set in step S2503 has elapsed.

When the value of the timer counter T2 is "0" (when the open period of the shutter 706 has elapsed), in step S2506, the shutter 706 is closed (to move the shutter 706 from the retracted position to the projecting position). ), and the driving unit 707 is put into a non-driving state. After execution of step S2506 or when a negative determination is made in step S2505 (when the value of the timer counter T2 is not "0"), the shutter drive processing is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode>
Next, transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described. FIG. 42(a) is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and FIG.

The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode shown in FIG. 42(a) is executed in step S513 of the game state transition processing (FIG. 17). It is executed. In FIG. 42(a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same steps as those in FIG. 22, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In this transition process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R big hit flag A, 16R big hit flag B, and 16R big hit flag C is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. These various jackpot flags are stored in step S410 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 16).

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42(b), four types of 16R jackpot result A, 16R jackpot result B, 16R jackpot result C, and 5R jackpot result D are set as jackpot types. Among them, 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C correspond to probability variable jackpot results, and 5R jackpot result D corresponds to normal jackpot results (non-probability variable jackpot results). The 5R jackpot result D is obtained by executing 5 rounds of the game, but the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 in each round game is not particularly limited. For example, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in a round game may be set to 1 time, and the upper limit open period may be set to 30 seconds. The opening with an opening period of 1 sec (short-term opening mode) may be repeated multiple times.

If it is determined in step S2601 that one of the 16R jackpot flag A to 16R jackpot flag C is stored, that is, if the executed opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result , the process advances to step S2602 to determine whether or not a fall flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. The drop flag indicates that the game ball has passed through the drop area 703a (FIG. 32(b)), and is stored in step S1705 of the drop winning process (FIG. 34).

If the drop flag is not stored (if the game ball has not passed through the drop area 703a), the process proceeds to step S902, and the high probability mode flag is set in the flag storage area 114e. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In the subsequent step S903, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e. As a result, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode.

When it is determined in step S2602 that the fall flag is stored (when the game ball passes through the fall region 703a), the process proceeds to step S904, and the fall flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is erased. At the same time, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e. Next, in step S905, the number-of-games counter GC is set to "100", after which the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. That is, when the drop flag is stored (when the game ball passes through the drop area 703a during the open/close execution mode), the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode even if the probability variable jackpot is won.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S2601 (when none of the 16R jackpot flag A to 16R jackpot flag C is stored), the processing in steps S904 and S905 is executed, and then when the opening/closing execution mode ends. end the migration process.

<Regarding the game flow during open/close execution mode>
Next, the game flow during the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 43 to 45. FIG.

As already described, in the present embodiment, the next round game is not executed unless V winning occurs in the round game being executed, and if the round game ends without V winning occurring, at that point The opening/closing execution mode is configured to end (see FIGS. 38 and 39). It should be noted that when V winning occurs during the round game, the round game does not end in the middle as in the first embodiment, and the number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit number of winning prizes, or It is configured such that the round game is performed until one of the end conditions that the open period of the variable prize winning device 32 reaches the upper limit open period is satisfied.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 32, a falling winning sensor 703 is provided in the variable winning device 32 . When the game ball passes the falling winning sensor 703 during the opening/closing execution mode (when falling winning occurs), even if the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the probability variable jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode ends. After that, the lottery mode does not shift to the high-probability mode, and is configured to be the low-probability mode.

Further, inside the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, there are a right entrance portion 504 in which either V winning or falling winning occurs, and a left entrance portion 505 in which neither falling winning nor V winning occurs. is provided. A shutter 706 is provided on the upstream side of the falling prize sensor 703 in the right side entrance portion 504 to distribute the game balls that have won the right side entrance portion 504 to the V prize sensor 705 side and the falling prize sensor 703 side. The shutter 706 is driven and controlled by the main controller 81 so as to be displaced to the falling prize sensor 703 at the winning timing of the upper limit winning number in the final round game.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the shutter 706 is opened, the passing ball A of the winning sensor 702 (first area) that triggered the opening is the falling area 703a (second area). area). That is, the required period from passing the passing ball A through the first area to reaching the shutter 706 or the second area is A passage length (distance) L between the first region and the shutter 706 is set to be longer than the period of .

With the above configuration, from the start of the opening and closing execution mode to the winning one before the upper limit winning number in the final round game, the game balls are continuously made to win in the right entrance portion 504 and V in each round game. By generating a winning prize, the round game is continued, and in the winning of the upper limit winning number in the final round game, the game ball is made to enter the left entrance portion 505 to avoid the occurrence of falling winning. , while maximizing the total number of prize balls that can be obtained in the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to shift to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

Further, on the upstream side of the variable prize winning device 32, a game ball shot with a strength less than a predetermined amount is guided to the left entrance portion 505, and a game ball shot with a strength of a predetermined amount or more is guided to the right entrance portion 504. A guide passage portion 401 is provided for guiding to (see FIG. 5). That is, it is possible to select which of the right side entrance portion 504 and the left side entrance portion 505 the game ball is to enter according to the player's intention. Therefore, as a player, it is an ideal operation mode to carry out the shooting operation of the game ball so as to achieve the winning switching of the entrance portions 504 and 505 described above.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is difficult or impossible for the player to determine which round the round game is being executed in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, a round game in which the variable winning device 32 is opened multiple times and a round game in which the variable winning device 32 is opened once are provided (see FIG. 38). The number of times of opening is diversified. As a result, even if the player counts the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened, it is impossible or difficult to grasp the number of rounds of the round game being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a notification (display or voice output) that allows the player to recognize the round game is not executed, and the round is not specified. For this reason, the player cannot obtain information on what round the game is in from the notification, making it even more difficult to determine what round it is.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeated for 1 second during the open/close execution mode, and the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is shared between each opening. Therefore, it is impossible or difficult to determine what round the player is in from the behavior of the variable prize winning device 32, and it is even more difficult to determine what round it is.

For these reasons, the player has no choice but to predict what round the round game being executed in the open/close execution mode is, in other words, at what timing the shutter 706 will be opened. Based on the prediction result, the game is played by aiming at the right side entrance portion 504 and the left side entrance portion 505 separately.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, the relationship between the player's shooting operation mode and the game result will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the operation of shooting the game ball with the strength that the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505 is called the first operation, and the operation that the game ball enters the right entrance portion 504 with the intensity that the game ball wins. The operation of shooting the game ball with the arrow is called the second operation. Also, the numbers in square brackets in FIG. 44 indicate the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 from the start of the opening/closing execution mode (the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 counted from the start of the opening/closing execution mode). is shown.

When the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is executed, in this mode, the upper limit winning number of the variable winning device 32 is set to 8 in all round games (see FIG. 38(a)). As described above, the shutter 706 that opens and closes the falling prize sensor 703 (falling area 703a) is opened at the winning of the upper limit winning number in the final round game, so the 128th (8 x 16 rounds) will be released at the timing of winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the second operation is performed until the 127th prize is won, and the first operation is performed when the 128th prize is won. While obtaining the total number of prize balls (128×15 prize balls), it is possible to shift to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed, in the mode, the upper limit winning number is set to 8 in the round games of the 1st to 5th rounds, and the upper limit winning in the remaining round games. The number is set to 1. In this case, the shutter 706 is opened at the timing when the 51st winning (8 x 5 rounds + 1 x 11 rounds) from the start of the open/close execution mode occurs. In this case, the second operation is performed until the 50th prize is won, and the first operation is performed when the 51st prize is won. It is possible to shift to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode while acquiring the number of prize balls.

Here, the opening timing of the shutter 706 when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed is the timing when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started. arrive sooner than Assuming that one game ball wins the variable winning device 32 for each opening of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. When t1) is converted to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A, it corresponds to the timing of the occurrence of the third prize in the seventh round of the round game.

For example, in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is actually executed, the player assumes that the 16R jackpot result A is the result, and predicts that the timing t1 will be around the 7th round. Suppose In this case, if the player continues the second operation from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to timing t1, the shutter 706 is opened at that timing, so that the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 moves over the falling area 703a. will pass through. As a result, as shown in FIG. 43(c), although the opening/closing execution mode can be completed and a total of 765 prize balls can be obtained, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode, and the low probability mode. will be played under

In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result C is actually executed and the player assumes the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B, or when the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B is actually executed. is being executed, even if the player assumes the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result A, the actual round (actual shutter opening timing) and the player's prediction round (prediction shutter opening timing) , and the game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 passes through the falling area 703a. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, there are cases where the opening/closing execution mode is punctured due to the prediction result of the player, and the total number of prize balls obtained in the opening/closing execution mode is reduced.

In this way, depending on the difference in the shooting operation of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to change whether or not to shift to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode, or to change the total number of prize balls in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the player predicts the number of the round of the round game being executed, and selects and enjoys how long the second operation is to be continued, thereby realizing a game like a so-called chicken race. be able to. As a result, the game during the opening/closing execution mode is preferably suppressed from becoming monotonous, and the game during the mode can be greatly excited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A falling area 703a is provided, and the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode by passing the game ball through the area 703a. In this case, if the game ball passes through the falling area 703a, it is disadvantageous for the player, so the player can enjoy the game by not allowing the game ball to pass through the falling area 703a. Moreover, since a game in which the game ball moves to a falling state or is avoided depending on the behavior of the game ball is realized, compared to a configuration based on internal processing such as a falling lottery, for example, the configuration is easier for the player to understand. In addition, it is possible to improve the original charm of the game machine by observing the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

A shutter 706 is provided which can be switched between an open state that allows the game ball to pass through the falling area 703a and a closed state that does not allow the game ball to pass through the falling area 703a, and the shutter 706 is changed from the closed state. The switching control for switching to the open state is configured to be executed during the open/close execution mode.

For example, if the game ball can always pass through the falling area 703a, the player may hesitate to let the variable winning device 32 win the game ball. The original game of the open/close execution mode for obtaining prize balls is spoiled. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the shutter 706 for opening and closing the falling area 703a is provided, even if the game ball is made to win the variable winning device 32, the period during which the game ball does not pass through the falling area 703a is ensured. As a result, it is possible to generate a prize to the variable prize winning device 32 while preventing the game ball from passing through the falling area 703a in the period of the open state or the timing thereof. That is, it is possible to impart a game aimed at preventing the game ball from passing through the falling area 703a while preventing the original game in the opening/closing execution mode from being spoiled.

A first game in which the opening timing of the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is the first timing, and a second game in which the opening timing is the second timing different from the first timing are provided.

For example, if the opening timing of the shutter 706 is fixed, as a result of the player being able to predict the timing, it is sufficient to pay attention to even that timing, and the interest in providing the fall area 703a is diminished. There is a risk of In this regard, in the present embodiment, games with different opening timings of the shutter 706 are provided to diversify the opening timings. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the opening timing of the shutter 706, and it is possible to appropriately evoke the feeling of excitement as to when the falling area 703a will be opened. As a result, the effect of the falling area 703a can be suitably exhibited, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In that case, in the present embodiment, the first game and the second game are configured in the open/close execution mode. As already mentioned, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a during the opening/closing execution mode, it falls down, which gives a sense of tension not found in the general opening/closing execution mode. . Nevertheless, since the opening timing of the shutter 706 (fall area 703a) is unknown or difficult to understand, it is possible to incorporate a strong excitement in the game in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the game during the opening/closing execution mode can be made significantly more interesting than the game in which the opening/closing execution mode is simply digested, and the amusement of the game can be suitably enhanced.

A fall area 703a and a privilege area (detection area of the V winning sensor 705) are arranged on the downstream side of the right entrance 504, and a game ball entering the right entrance 504 is distributed to each area by a shutter 706. . According to this configuration, since it is essential to enter the game ball into the right entrance portion 504 in order to obtain the privilege, the player is prevented from continuously avoiding the right entrance portion 504 and shooting the game ball. be. Therefore, the significance of the fall area 703a can be suitably exhibited.

In this case, the privilege is the continuation of the round, and unless the game ball is passed through the privilege area, the next round game is not executed, and the game in the opening/closing execution mode is not satisfactorily executed. Therefore, it is possible to favorably encourage the entry of a game ball into the right entrance portion 504, and to favorably provide an opportunity to enjoy the thrill of whether or not the game ball passes through the falling area 703a. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of Eikyurenso (a state in which the game ball never passes through the fall area 703a and the high probability mode persists by keeping the game ball entering the left entrance 505).

Instead of switching the shutter 706 (fall area 703a) to the open state in each round game in the open/close execution mode, it is configured to switch to the open state in a predetermined predetermined round (16th round). In this case, it is possible to provide a game to be enjoyed by having the player anticipate the switching round to the open state and aiming not to let the game ball pass through the falling area 703a.

In that case, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened per round is diversified so that it is impossible or difficult to determine from the behavior of the variable winning device 32 what round the round game is in execution. I made it so that In this case, it is impossible or difficult to predict at what timing the switching round to the open state will come, so it is possible to suitably evoke the excitement of whether or not the game ball passes through the falling area 703a. .

When the shutter 706 is opened, the passing ball A of the prize winning sensor 702 (first area), which triggered the opening, can pass through the falling area 703a (second area).

Since the falling area 703a is a disadvantageous area for the player, an action such as adjusting the shooting mode of the game ball so as not to pass the falling area 703a after seeing that the game ball has passed the prize winning sensor 702 is assumed. be. If such cheating behavior becomes rampant, there is a risk that the fairness of the game among the players will be impaired. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the passing ball A itself that triggered the switch to the open state passes through the falling area 703a, it is not possible to take action after seeing that the game ball has passed the winning sensor 702. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the attacking behavior as described above. As a result of this, the fairness of the game is ensured, the desire to play the game is aroused, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In that case, the game ball is configured to be restricted from passing through the falling area 703a without passing through the prize winning sensor 702.例文帳に追加In this case, it is possible to prevent unexpected game balls from flowing into the falling area 703a. As a result, the occurrence of disturbance is suppressed, and the fairness of the game can be favorably ensured. In addition, since it is possible to limit the flow of game balls that should be taken into account when designing the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden during design.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is different from that in each of the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the passage structure of the variable winning device 32 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 47 is a front view of the variable winning device 32 in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 46 , a vertically extending first passage portion 801 is provided behind the right inlet portion 504 . The first passage portion 801 communicates with the passage portion 502 (FIG. 7(a)), and the game balls that have entered the right entrance portion 504 among the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 32a (FIG. 6(b)) down. A winning sensor 802 for detecting a game ball entering the right entrance 504 is arranged in the middle of the first passage 801 . The winning sensor 802 detects only whether or not a game ball enters the big winning opening 32a, similarly to the winning sensor 509 according to the first embodiment.

A highly accurate V winning sensor 803 is arranged downstream of the winning sensor 802 in the first passage portion 801 . Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery mode is configured to shift to the high probability mode based on the game ball that has won the large winning opening 32a passing the high accuracy V winning sensor 803. . That is, the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803 or its arrangement area is a specific area that triggers the transition to the high-probability mode. In the following description, the arrangement area of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 or its detection area may be referred to as a high-accuracy V area 803a.

A second passage portion 804 branching from the first passage portion 801 is provided at an intermediate portion between the prize winning sensor 802 and the highly accurate V prize winning sensor 803 in the first passage portion 801 . A discharge sensor 805 is arranged in the middle of the second passage portion 804 . The ejection sensor 805 is for detecting that the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 has been ejected to the outside of the variable winning device 32 .

A third passage portion 806 is provided in the first passage portion 801 downstream of the highly accurate V winning sensor 803 to join the first passage portion 801 to the left vertical passage portion 508 . The third passage portion 806 is inclined downward toward the left vertical passage portion 508 and guides the game ball that has passed through the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 to the left vertical passage portion 508 .

A continuation V winning sensor 807 is arranged downstream of the confluence with the third passage portion 806 in the left vertical passage portion 508 . The continuous V winning sensor 807 plays the same role as the V winning sensor 705 according to the third embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment as well, the next round game is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the continuation V winning sensor 807 during execution of one round game. Below, in order to distinguish between the passage of the game ball to the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803 and the passage of the game ball to the continuous V-winning sensor 807, the former may be referred to as a high-accuracy V-winning and the latter as a continuous V-winning. . The continuous V winning sensor 807 does not play the role of detecting whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 32a, but only detects the occurrence of continuous V winning. Further, the continuation V winning sensor 807 also plays a role of detecting that the game ball entering the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504 is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 32 similarly to the discharge sensor 805 .

The winning sensor 802, the highly accurate V winning sensor 803, the discharge sensor 805, and the continuous V winning sensor 807 are electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the detection areas of the sensors 802, 803, 805, and 807 are used for the game. Predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main controller 81 when the ball passes through. The main controller 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through each sensor 802, 803, 805, 807 based on this detection information. In addition, when the passage of the game ball to the prize winning sensor 802 is grasped by the main control device 81, the payout of the prize ball is performed, but the game to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803, the ejection sensor 805 and the continuous V winning sensor 807 Even if the passage of the ball is grasped, the prize ball is not paid out.

Each passage width of the first passage portion 801, the second passage portion 804 and the third passage portion 806 is larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter dimension of the game ball, and each passage portion Each of 801, 804 and 806 is a single ball passage. A game ball that has passed through the discharge sensor 805 or the continuation V winning sensor 807 is guided to the discharge passage board 88 (FIG. 3) and discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 .

A shutter 808 is arranged above the highly accurate V winning sensor 803 so as to cover the highly accurate V winning sensor 803 from above. The shutter 808 is held so as to be slidable in the width direction of the first passage portion 801 (specifically, in the front-rear direction). That is, the shutter 808 has a protruding position (advance position) that protrudes into the first passage portion 801 and a retracted position (backward position) that retracts rearward from the protruding position and suppresses the amount of protrusion into the first passage portion 801. ) and can be displaced.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the shutter 808 is arranged at the projecting position, the shutter 808 blocks the flow path to the highly accurate V region 803a. As a result, the high-probability V area 803 a is closed, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 cannot pass through the high-probability V winning sensor 803 . The game ball whose inflow into the high accuracy V area 803a is restricted by the shutter 808 contacts the upper surface 808a of the shutter 808, is guided to the second passage 804, and passes through the discharge sensor 805.

The upper surface portion 808a of the shutter 808 is an inclined surface that descends toward the second passage portion 804, so that the game ball can be guided to the second passage portion 804 satisfactorily. The height position of the shutter 808 is a height position that does not hinder the flow of the game ball to the second passage portion 804 in a state where the shutter 808 is arranged at the projecting position. It is set at a height position where it is not formed between the upper surface portion 808 a and the second passage portion 804 . In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion 808a is inclined at substantially the same inclination angle as the second passage portion 804, and the upper surface portion 706a and the branch passage portion 704 are set at a height position where a substantially straight spherical passage is formed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), when the shutter 808 is arranged at the retracted position, the shutter 808 retracts from above the high-accuracy V area 803a, and the area 803a is opened upward. As a result, the high-probability V area 803 a is opened, and the game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 can pass through the high-probability V winning sensor 803 . In addition, the game ball that has passed the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 flows down the third passage portion 806 and reaches the left vertical passage portion 508 , and also passes through the continuous V winning sensor 807 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the high-accuracy V area 803a is closed, the game ball cannot pass through the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803, but it is possible to pass in a range where it is difficult to pass compared to the open state. may be The point is that the easiness of passage of the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 should be different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

A front region of the passage structure is a light transmission region, and game balls flowing through the passage structure can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加It should be noted that the entire passage structure does not necessarily have to be visible, and at least the shutter 808 (distribution of game balls) and the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803 (game balls pass through the detection area of the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803) ) and the continuous V winning sensor 807 (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the continuous V winning sensor 807) can be visually recognized.

The variable winning device 32 is provided with a shutter driving section 809 for driving the shutter 808 . The drive unit 809 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the solenoid to the shutter 808 . The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . By driving the solenoid, the shutter 808 is retracted from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the high-precision V area 803a is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 81 is stopped, the shutter 808 advances from the retracted position to the projecting position by the biasing force of the biasing means (such as a spring), and the high-accuracy V area 803a switches from the open state to the closed state. be replaced.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the variable prize winning device 32 on the front surface of the game board 24a, there are a first display portion 811 displaying the character "A" and a second display portion 811 displaying the character "B". A display unit 812 is provided. The first display portion 811 and the second display portion 812 are arranged above the left entrance portion 505 and the second display portion 812, respectively, so that the player can follow the A route through which the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505. , is provided to indicate the flow path through which game balls enter the right inlet portion 504 as a B route.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the operating mode of the shutter 808 (opening/closing mode of the highly accurate V region 803a) will be described. FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type table according to the present embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the shutter distribution table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the opening/closing mode of the high-accuracy V area 803a.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48(a), four types of jackpot results, 16R jackpot result A to 16R jackpot result D, are provided, and the shutter 808 is arranged to correspond to each of these jackpot types. is set. The operation mode of the shutter 808 corresponding to each jackpot type is defined in the shutter apportionment table stored in the apportionment table storage area 113b of the ROM113.

As shown in FIG. 48(b), in the shutter allocation table, the operation mode of the shutter 808 in the 5th round, 10th round and 16th round game is defined corresponding to each jackpot type. . As for the operation mode of the shutter 808, a game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 cannot be distributed to the high-accuracy V winning prize sensor 803 side, or can be distributed to the second passage portion 804 side more easily than the high-accuracy V winning prize sensor 803 side. A distribution mode and a high distribution mode in which a game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 can be distributed to the high-accuracy V winning prize sensor 803 side, or more easily distributed to the high-accuracy V winning prize sensor 803 side than the second passage portion 804 side. Two types are provided.

In the shutter apportionment table, which of these modes the shutter 808 should be operated for each round is determined for each jackpot type. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot result A, it is operated in a high distribution mode in the 10th round, and in a low distribution mode in the 5th and 16th rounds, and in the 16R jackpot result B, a high distribution mode is operated in the 5th round. Apportionment mode, 10th and 16th rounds are operated in a low apportionment mode, and in the 16R jackpot result C, a high apportionment mode is in the 16th round, and a low apportionment mode is in the 5th and 10th rounds. is set to work with Further, in the 16R jackpot result D, all of the 5th, 10th and 16th rounds are set to operate in a low allocation mode. It should be noted that the shutter 808 does not operate in any of the 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results D in round games other than the above, and the high-probability V area 803a is closed.

Here, the low allocation mode and the high allocation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 48(c). First, the low allocation mode will be described. In the low distribution mode, the opening operation of the shutter 808 (displacement from the projecting position to the retracted position) is performed only once in the round game. Specifically, it is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 48(c-1), at the start timing (timing t1) of the round game, the shutter 808 is positioned at the projected position (the position where the high-accuracy V area 803a is closed). Then, at the timing t2 when the first prize to the variable prize winning device 32 is generated, it is displaced to the retracted position (the position where the high accuracy V area 803a is opened), and a predetermined short period (for example, 0.01 sec) elapses. After that, it returns to the projecting position. In this case, since the shutter 808 is open for a short period of time, game balls that have entered the right entrance portion 504 are distributed to the second passage portion 804 by the shutter 808 and pass through the discharge sensor 805 .

Next, the high allocation mode will be described. In the high distribution mode, the opening operation of the shutter 808 is performed twice in the round game. Among these, the opening operation for the first time is the same as the opening operation in the low allocation mode, so the explanation is omitted. As shown in FIG. 48(c-2), when the second winning to the variable winning device 32 occurs at timing t3, the shutter 808 is displaced to the retracted position as the second opening operation. After that, the shutter 808 returns to the projecting position at timing t4 after a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has passed. In this case, since the open period of the shutter 808 is longer than in the case of the low distribution mode, the game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 is distributed to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side, and the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 pass through.

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the required period from when the game ball passes through the detection area of the prize winning sensor 802 to when it reaches the arrangement area of the shutter 808 is The distance between the prize winning sensor 802 and the shutter 808 is set so as to be longer than the required period from passing through the area until the shutter 808 is displaced to the retracted position. Further, the opening period of the shutter 808 in the second opening operation is set longer than the required period until the game ball that has passed through the prize winning sensor 802 reaches the high accuracy V prize winning sensor 803 . Therefore, when the opening operation is performed for the second time, the winning ball that triggered the opening of the shutter 808 passes through the highly accurate V winning sensor 803 .

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing executed by MPU 112 of main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed in place of the normal process of FIG. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are given to the same processing as those in FIG. 14, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the electric support processing in step S205, the V distribution processing for driving and controlling the shutter 808 is executed in step S3001. Here, the processing for V allocation will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the V allocation process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the shutter 808 is being opened, that is, whether or not the shutter 808 is arranged at the retracted position. If the shutter 808 is not open and the high-accuracy V area 803a is in the closed state, the process advances to step S3102, and the value of the open counter SC for the shutter provided in the counter area 114d of the RAM 114 is "1". ” is determined. The open counter SC counts the number of times the shutter 808 is opened.

If the value of the open counter SC is not "1", the process advances to step S3103 to determine whether it is time to open the shutter 808 for the first time. As already explained, this first open timing corresponds to the timing at which the first winning to the variable winning device 32 occurs in the 5th, 10th and 16th rounds of the round game.

If it is the first open timing, the process proceeds to step S3104, the shutter apportionment table (FIG. 48(b)) stored in the apportionment table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the shutter in the current round game is determined. It is determined whether or not the operation mode of 808 is the high distribution mode. If it is in the high distribution mode, the value of the open counter SC is set to "2" in step S3106. to set the value of the open counter SC to "1".

After executing step S3106 or step S3107, in step S3108, the open period of the shutter 808 for the first opening is set. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "50" (0.1 sec). In the subsequent step S3109, the drive unit 809 is brought into a drive state to open the shutter 808. FIG.

If the determination in step S3102 is affirmative (if the value of the open counter SC is "1"), the process advances to step S3110 to determine whether it is time to open the shutter 808 for the second time. As already described, this second opening timing corresponds to the timing when the second winning to the variable winning device 32 occurs in the round game of the round set in the high allocation mode.

If it is the second opening timing, the process advances to step S3111 to set the value of the timer counter T2 to "500" (1 sec) in order to set the opening period for the second opening. Thereafter, the process advances to step S3109 to execute processing for opening the shutter 808 . After execution of step S3109, if a negative determination is made in step S3103 (if it is not the first opening timing) or if a negative determination is made in step S3110 (if it is not the second opening timing), the V distribution processing ends.

If the determination in step S3101 is affirmative (if the shutter 808 is open), the process advances to step S3112 to determine whether the value of the timer counter T2 is "0". This process determines whether or not the open period of the shutter 808 set in step S3108 or S3111 has passed.

When the value of the timer counter T2 is "0" (when the shutter 808 opening period has elapsed), in step S3113, the driving unit 809 is brought into a non-driving state to close the shutter 808. FIG. In subsequent step S3114, the value of the open counter SC is decremented by 1, and the number of times the shutter 808 has been opened is updated. After execution of step S3114 or when a negative determination is made in step S3112 (when the value of the timer counter T2 is not "0"), the V distribution processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 49), after executing the V distribution processing in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the game ball launch control processing for controlling the launch of the game ball.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening process of step S510 (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the big winning opening opening/closing process of FIG. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as those in FIG. 18, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If it is determined in step S603 that the value of the timer counter T is "0", setting processing for each round is executed in step S3201. Since this process is the same as the process in FIG. 20 according to the first embodiment, it will be described with reference to FIG.

In the setting process for each round, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "16". If the value of the round counter RC is not "16", the continuation flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased in step S802.

After execution of step S802 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S801 (when the value of the round counter RC is "16"), in step S803, the opening period of the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set. . Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "15000" corresponding to the upper limit open period (30 sec) for one round.

In the subsequent step S804, based on the jackpot type flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the jackpot type corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode being executed or being executed is grasped. Also, in this step, based on the value of the round counter RC, it is grasped what round the round game to be set (the round game to be started from now) is. In the subsequent step S805, the upper limit number distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the upper limit number of winning prizes for the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set.

Here, the upper limit number distribution table according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the upper limit winning number of each round game is shared among the 16 jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C. FIG. Specifically, in any of the 16 jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C, the maximum winning number is 2 in the 5th, 10th and 16th rounds, and 8 in the other rounds. It's becoming In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result D, the upper limit winning number is common in all round games, and is five in any round. It should be noted that the specific upper limit number of prizes shown in FIG. 52 is merely an example, and the numbers are not limited to these numbers.

Returning to the setting process for each round (FIG. 20), in step S805, the result of grasping what round the round game of the jackpot type and setting target in step S804 is, and the upper limit number distribution table Based on the above, the corresponding upper limit number of winning prizes is derived. In the following step S806, a value corresponding to the above derived upper limit winning number is set as the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. After step S806 is executed, the setting process for each round ends.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 51), after executing the setting process for each round in step S3201, the big winning opening opening process is executed in step S605.

If the determination in step S602 is affirmative (when the value of the timer counter T is "0") in the big winning opening opening/closing process, in step S3202, the detection state of the winning sensor 509 or the winning sensor 802 (step of FIG. 13) Based on the reading result of various sensors in S101), it is determined whether or not a prize to the variable prize winning device 32 has occurred. If a prize has been awarded to the variable prize winning device 32, the process proceeds to step S3203, and the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by one. After execution of step S3203 or when a negative determination is made in step S3202 (when no winning to the variable winning device 32 occurs), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the continuous V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. Determine whether or not

Here, the V winning process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the V winning process of FIG.

The processing of steps S3301 to S3306 is for grasping that the game ball has passed the continuous V winning sensor 807 (occurrence of continuous V winning). 19 are the same as steps S701 to S706 in FIG. It should be noted that the continuation V winning flag in step S3305 is a flag indicating that continuation V winning has occurred, and the continuation V winning command in step S3306 is for notifying effect control device 82 that continuation V winning has occurred. is a command.

After execution of step S3304 or step S3306, in step S3307, it is determined whether or not the high-accuracy V prize flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. The high probability V winning flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed the high probability V winning prize sensor 803 (occurrence of high probability V winning prize). If the high-probability V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3308, and based on the detection state of the high-probability V-winning sensor 803 (the reading result of various sensors in step S101), whether or not a high-probability V prize has occurred. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the high accuracy V winning sensor 803).

When it is determined that a high-probability V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S3309 whether or not the valid period of the high-probability V prize is valid. The effective period is a predetermined period in anticipation of a period in which a high-accuracy V winning can occur normally. For example, the period in which the shutter 808 is in an open state is set as the effective period. If it is determined that the validity period has not expired, the process proceeds to step S3310, an error command is set as an abnormality has occurred, and then the V winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the valid period, the process proceeds to step S3311, and stores the highly accurate V prize flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. In the following step S3312, a highly accurate V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The highly accurate V winning command is a command for notifying the effect control device 82 that the highly accurate V winning has occurred. After the execution of step S3312, if affirmative determination is made in step S3307 (if the high-accuracy V winning flag is stored) or if negative determination is made in step S3308 (if high-accuracy V winning has not occurred), for V winning End the process.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 51), when it is determined in step S3204 that the continuous V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3205. In step S3205, the continuation V winning flag stored in the various flags storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the continuation flag is set in the various flags storage area 114e. The continuation flag is a flag indicating that the next round game should be executed, in other words, the open/close execution mode should be continued even after the round game being executed is finished.

After execution of step S3205 or when a negative determination is made in step S3204 (when the continuation V winning flag is not stored), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" in step S613. Also in this embodiment, after the continuation flag is stored in step S3205, the processing of step S613 is performed without executing the processing of setting the value of the winning counter PC to "0" (the processing of step S612 in FIG. 18). Execute the process. That is, in the same manner as in the third embodiment, when V winning occurs during the round game, if the number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 32 at that time is less than the upper limit number of winning prizes, the round game is terminated. Instead, the round game is continued until the winning number reaches the upper limit winning number or until the opening period of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit opening period.

<Transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode>
Next, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed instead of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same processing as those in FIG. 22, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In this transition process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the high-precision V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. When the high-probability V prize flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S902, where the high-probability V prize flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is erased, and the high probability mode flag is set in the area 114e. do. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In the subsequent step S903, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e. As a result, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S3401 that the high-accuracy V winning flag is not stored, a high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e in step S904, and the number of games counter GC in step S905. is set to "100". After execution of step S903 or step S905, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

<Regarding the game flow during open/close execution mode>
Next, the game flow during the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 55 to 57. FIG.

As already described, in the present embodiment, the next round game is not executed unless the continuous V winning occurs in the round game being executed, and if the round game ends without the continuous V winning occurring, the The open/close execution mode is terminated at this point (see FIG. 51). Further, as shown in FIG. 46, a highly accurate V winning sensor 803 is provided in the variable winning device 32 . When the game ball passes the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 during the opening/closing execution mode (when high-accuracy V winning occurs), the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 When the game ball does not pass through, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode.

Further, inside the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, a left entrance portion 505 connected to the continuous V winning prize sensor 807 and a right entrance portion 504 connected to the high accuracy V winning prize sensor 803 are provided. A shutter 808 is arranged on the upstream side of the high-accuracy V winning prize sensor 803 in the right entrance portion 504, and in the operation mode of the shutter 808, a game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 is directed to the high-accuracy V winning prize sensor 803 side. A high distribution mode in which the balls are distributed or easily distributed and a low distribution mode in which the game balls entering the right entrance portion 504 are not distributed or distributed to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side are set. When the game ball is distributed to the high-probability V winning sensor 803 side, the game ball passes through the high-probability V winning sensor 803 and then also passes through the continuous V winning sensor 807 (FIG. 46(b)). In other words, both a high-accuracy V prize and a continuous V prize are generated. On the other hand, when the game ball is not sorted to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side, the game ball passes through the discharge sensor 805 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (Fig. 46(a)). In other words, neither the high-accuracy V winning nor the continuous V winning occurs.

Further, on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32, a game ball shot with a strength less than a predetermined amount is guided to the left entrance portion 505, and a game ball shot with a strength of a predetermined amount or more is guided to the right entrance portion 504. A guide passage portion 401 is provided for guiding to (see FIG. 5). That is, it is possible to select which of the right side entrance portion 504 and the left side entrance portion 505 the game ball is to enter according to the intention of the player.

As already explained, in any of the opening and closing execution modes corresponding to the 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C, the shutter 808 does not operate in the round game of the 1st round to the 4th round, and the high accuracy V area 803a is opened. Since it remains in the closed state, the player performs a shooting operation so that the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505 . As a result, continuous V winning occurs in the round game of each round, and the round game proceeds to the fifth round.

At a predetermined timing before the start of the fifth round game (for example, the start timing of the waiting period between the fourth rounds), the pachinko machine 10 executes the first effect DR1. This first effect DR1 is for prompting the player to select whether to let the game ball enter the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504 to enter the game ball. As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first effect DR1, for example, on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, a character image 601 imitating a god is displayed along with the message "Choose either route A or route B." A message image 821 is displayed in which characters such as "Jay" are displayed. The first effect DR1 is continued until the round game ball in the 5th round ends.

For example, it is assumed that the open execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result A, and the shutter 808 is driven in a low apportionment mode in the fifth round of the round game (FIG. 48(b)). In this case, when the player selects the B route and allows the game ball to enter the right side entrance portion 504, the game ball moves toward the discharge sensor 805 because the shutter 808 is driven in a low distribution mode. The prizes are sorted out, and neither a high-accuracy V prize nor a continuous V prize occurs. As a result, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 55(a), the open/close execution mode ends with the end of the fifth round of the round game, resulting in a so-called puncture. Further, in this case, since the opening/closing execution mode ends in a state in which no high-probability V winning occurs, the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Then, when the timing for starting the ending comes, the second effect DR2 is executed to suggest or teach that the challenge game to the high-probability mode will fail. As shown in FIG. 56(b), in the second effect DR2, for example, on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, a character image 601 and characters such as "I'm sorry. message image 822 is displayed. The second effect DR2 is executed during at least part of the ending period.

On the other hand, when the player selects the A route and causes the game ball to win the left entrance portion 505, the game ball passes through the continuous V winning sensor 807 and continuous V winning occurs. A round game is executed. In this case, the third effect DR3 is executed during the waiting period of the fifth round or the round game of the sixth round. As shown in FIG. 56(c), in the third effect DR3, for example, together with the character image 601, a message image 823 displaying characters such as "Excellent!" is displayed.

After that, at a predetermined timing before the start of the 10th round game, the first effect DR1 is executed again, and the game ball is made to enter the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504. selection is prompted. When the open execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result A, the shutter 808 is driven in a high allocation mode in the tenth round game (FIG. 48(b)).

In this case, when the player selects the B route this time and causes the game ball to win on the right side entrance portion 504 side, the game ball passes the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 and high accuracy V winning occurs. do. Further, since the game ball passes the continuous V winning sensor 807 and continuous V winning occurs, the 11th round game is executed. In this case, in the waiting period of the 10th round or the round game of the 11th round, the effect DR4 that suggests or teaches that the challenge game to the high-probability mode is successful is executed. As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the fourth effect DR4, for example, the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 displays a character image 601 together with characters such as "Well done! Let's give you a reward!" A displayed message image 824 is displayed. Then, after the fourth effect DR4 is displayed for a certain period of time, the display screen G displays a round effect image for high probability to congratulate the occurrence of the high probability V prize.

After that, when the round game of the 16th round is started, the shutter 808 is driven in a low allocation mode, but since this is the final round of the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball is made to enter the left entrance portion 505 side or the right entrance portion. Regardless of whether the 504 side wins or not, the opening/closing execution mode is carried out to the end. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode based on the occurrence of the high-precision V winning during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 55(a), the opening/closing execution mode is completed, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. In addition, in the waiting period of the fifteenth round, the first effect DR1 is not executed, and the round effect image for the probability variation or the waiting period effect image for the probability variation is displayed.

On the other hand, when the player selects the A route in the 10th round of the round game and causes the game ball to enter the left entrance portion 505 side, a continuous V winning occurs and the 11th round of the round game is executed. be done. However, since the shutter 808 is not driven in the high-distribution mode after that, the high-accuracy V prize does not occur, and the challenge game to the high-accuracy mode fails. That is, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 55(a), the opening/closing execution mode is completed, but the transition to the high-probability mode does not occur. In this case, the second effect DR2 is executed in the waiting period of the 10th round or the round game of the 11th round, and thereafter, a round effect image for normal use (for non-positive change) different from the round effect image for positive change. is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 55(b) and (c), when the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result B or the 16R jackpot result C, the 5th round, 10th round and 16th round In each round game, depending on whether the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left entrance part 505 or the right entrance part 504, the number of round games carried out in the opening and closing execution mode number) and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode (advantage in the game after the opening/closing execution mode). In addition, when the opening and closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result B, and the shutter 808 is driven in a high distribution mode in the fifth round game, the player moves the right side of the entrance part 504 side in the round game. When the aim and the high-accuracy V prize are generated, the fifth effect DR5 for prompting the left entrance portion 505 to win the game ball is executed in the waiting period of the ninth round or the round game of the tenth round. be. As shown in FIG. 57(b), in the fifth effect DR5, for example, a message image 825 displaying characters such as "Aim for the A route" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling offended due to the opening/closing execution mode being punctured in spite of the fact that a highly accurate V prize is generated.

As described above, depending on the difference in the shooting operation of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to change whether or not to shift to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode, or to change the total number of prize balls in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict the round in which the shutter 808 will be driven in a high allocation mode, and to select and enjoy the game in which round the right entrance portion 504 is aimed. As a result, the game during the opening/closing execution mode is preferably suppressed from becoming monotonous, and the game during the mode can be greatly excited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A left entrance portion 505 (first region) and a right entrance portion 504 (second region) are provided in which the player can separately hit a game ball. Regardless of whether it is a situation in which the shutter 865 is driven in a distribution mode) or a second game situation (a situation in which the shutter 865 is driven in a low distribution mode), the first benefit (round continuation) can be obtained, Regarding the right entrance portion 504, although it is possible to obtain a second privilege (transition to a high probability mode) that is more advantageous than the first privilege under the first gaming state, under the second gaming state, the first privilege and It was set as the structure which cannot obtain any of the 2nd privilege.

According to the above configuration, the game ball is entered into the left entrance portion 505 to aim for the first privilege, or the game ball is entered into the right entrance portion 504 to acquire both the first privilege and the second privilege. The player himself/herself can choose whether to take the risk of not being able to aim to obtain the second privilege. In this case, since the player's decision affects the result of the game, the player can actively participate in the game, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. In addition, in the above configuration, a player who wants to obtain a large second privilege while enjoying the thrill of not being able to acquire either the first privilege or the second privilege actively enters the game ball into the right entrance portion 504. A player who plays a game and does not like such thrills can play a game in which a game ball enters the left entrance portion 505 . That is, it is possible to change the way of playing a game according to each player's taste and mood each time, and to provide various ways of enjoying with one gaming machine.

One round game in the opening/closing execution mode is in the first game situation, and another round game is in the second game situation. In this case, the player is forced to select which of the left entrance portion 505 and the right entrance portion 504 should be aimed at while playing the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is performed in a certain sense of tension. can play. As a result, compared to the case where the opening/closing execution mode is simply completed indifferently, the game during the mode can be greatly excited, and the player's desire to play can be favorably enhanced.

For the tenth round game, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R big win result A is set to the first game situation, and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R big win result B is set to the second game situation. That is, even in the same round round game, depending on the type of opening and closing execution mode, the first game situation or the second game situation differs, and the round (timing) to aim at the right entrance part 504 is diverse. has been made In this case, since the round in which the player should aim at the right side entrance 504 is not uniquely determined, it is possible to enhance the fun of aiming at the left side entrance 505 and the right side entrance 504 while predicting the round. .

The first privilege is the continuation of the round, and the second privilege is the transition to the high-probability mode. In this case, it is possible to realize a game aiming at transition to the high probability mode at the risk of ending the opening/closing execution mode without executing the next round game, and to suitably liven up the game during the opening/closing execution mode. becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, a so-called type 1 type pachinko machine was exemplified, but the present invention can be applied to a type 1 type 2 type mixed type pachinko machine, and the result of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines equipped with a so-called small winning rush function, include many special winning results or special winning results (so-called small winnings) and increase the number of balls obtained by frequent small winning games. It can also be applied to

Examples of pachinko machines of the one type and two type mixed type are as follows. When the result of the winning lottery based on the winning to one of the operation ports 33 is a big winning result, the game shifts to an opening/closing execution mode (big winning game state) for opening and closing the variable winning device 32.例文帳に追加As the types of jackpots in the case of a jackpot result based on winning a prize to the operation port 33, a jackpot result with time reduction that shifts to a time-saving game state after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and a jackpot result with a time reduction that shifts to a normal game state (shifts to a time-saving game state) No time saving jackpot result is set, and when it is sorted to the time saving jackpot result, it shifts to a time saving game state (so-called rush state) after the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

In the time-saving game state, the frequency of winning to the other operation port 34 is high, but the winning lottery based on the winning to the operation port 34 includes a small winning result, and when the small winning result is obtained. , the variable winning device 32 or a second variable winning device different therefrom is opened and closed to an opening/closing execution mode (small winning game state). A game ball won in the variable prize winning device 32 or the second variable prize winning device passes through a V prize opening provided in the prize winning device, which is more advantageous to the player than in the case of a small winning result. , it shifts to an opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game state) for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 or the second variable winning device.

When the game ball passes through the V winning opening and shifts to the big winning game state, the small winning result with time reduction that shifts to the time saving game state after that, and the game ball passing through the V winning opening are included in the types of the above small winning results. When it passes and shifts to a jackpot game state, after that, it shifts to a normal game state (does not shift to a time-saving game state) and a small hit result without time reduction is set. That is, when the small winning game corresponding to the result of the small winning with time saving is performed, the game ball passes through the V winning opening, so that after the big winning game is finished, the state is shifted to the time saving game state again. A plurality of stop results corresponding to small wins are set for each small win result, and a stop result selected from among them is stop-displayed on the special figure display part 43 in the game round in which the small win is won. . When the big winning game is executed following the small winning game, the stop result is continuously displayed even after the small winning game ends, and is continuously displayed until the big winning game ends.

For example, when the third embodiment is applied to the above configuration, when the time-saving jackpot result is won, or when the jackpot is achieved through a small winning game corresponding to the time-saving jackpot result In the open/close execution mode, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a, it does not shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game (shifts to the normal game state), and when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a , It can be configured to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the case of applying a configuration for performing specific notification (notification that allows the player to recognize the upper limit number of winning prizes) by the stop result of the special figure display unit 43 for the above configuration, a jackpot after a small winning game It is possible to make the upper limit winning number of each round game in the big winning game correspond to each stop result for the small winning, and perform the above-mentioned specific notification according to the stopping result for the small winning.

Further, as a pachinko machine having a small hit RUSH function, there is one in which the degree of advantage of the game state is differentiated according to the length of the game time for one game round of the second special figure. Specifically, when the game state is to be in a disadvantageous state, the variation display time of the second special figure is made extremely long. As a result, the opening timing of the variable prize winning device 32 is greatly delayed from the time of winning the prize to the operation port, and the frequency of opening the variable prize winning device 32 per unit time is greatly reduced. Conversely, when the game state is to be in an advantageous state, by shortening the variable display time of the second special figure, the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time is increased. By adopting such a configuration, even if the game ball is entered in the operation opening corresponding to the second special figure (hereinafter referred to as "second operation opening") under a disadvantageous state, the player is unlikely to receive a profit, It is a specification that makes it easier to receive profits only after winning the second operation opening under advantageous conditions. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the first special figure in the disadvantageous state is set to the same length of time as a general pachinko machine (shorter time than the fluctuation display of the second special figure in the disadvantageous state), and the disadvantageous state In the case of , it is possible to play a game by winning a game ball in the operation opening corresponding to the first special figure (hereinafter referred to as "first operation opening"). In addition, in a pachinko machine having such a configuration, if the game round of the second special figure is executed under a disadvantageous state, there is a risk that the next game round will not be started for a long period of time. It is configured such that the game round of the special figure and the game round of the second special figure can be executed in duplicate.

For example, when the third embodiment is applied to the above configuration, when winning a jackpot result corresponding to shifting to an advantageous state (rush state) after the opening/closing execution mode, the jackpot result If the game ball passes through the falling area 703a during the execution of the corresponding opening and closing execution mode, it does not transition to an advantageous state after the opening and closing execution mode ends (a disadvantageous state in which the fluctuation display time of the second special figure is extremely long, Alternatively, although the small winning game itself is frequently executed, the winning to the variable winning device for small winning does not occur or shifts to an intermediate state in which it is less likely to occur than in the advantageous state.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, either the number of winning game balls into the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit winning number or the opening period of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit opening period. Although the configuration is such that the round game ends when the condition is satisfied, the configuration may be such that the round game ends when the former condition is satisfied without the latter condition.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the specific area (the detection area of the V winning sensor 507, the falling area 703a, and the high accuracy V area 803a) is provided in the ball entering area (variable winning device 32) provided with the opening/closing means. However, it may be provided in a ball entry area where the opening/closing means is not provided. In other words, the variable winning device 32 according to each of the above-described embodiments is such that "in the game area PE, a ball entry area is formed so as to have a space inside thereof, and at least one ball entry area is formed in the game area PE. A port (ball entry portion) is provided, and a game ball can enter the space (within the ball entry area) through the ball entry port (in other words, without going through the ball entrance A game ball cannot enter the space), an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entrance is provided, and a specific area is provided in the space or on the downstream side of the space, Although it can be said that the game ball that has entered the space can pass through the specific area, the opening/closing means may be omitted.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the guiding passage portion 401 guides the game ball to the left entrance portion 505 and guides the game ball to the right entrance portion 504. A configuration in which only guidance to the entrance portion 504 is performed may be employed. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the guide passage portion 401 is composed of a resin member (continuous wall portion), but at least a part thereof may be composed of a game nail.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has passed through the specific area (the detection area of the V winning sensor 507, the falling area 703a, and the high accuracy V area 803a) exits the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge passage (not shown). Although it is configured to be discharged, it may be configured to be discharged to the game area PE. This is the same for game balls that have passed through each detection area of the winning sensor 509 , the V winning sensor 705 , the discharge sensor 805 and the continuous V winning sensor 807 .

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 32 can win when the game ball flows down the right route, but the variable winning device 32 wins when the game ball flows down the left route. It may be configured to be possible, or may be configured to allow the variable winning device 32 to win regardless of whether the game ball flows down either the right route or the left route. In the latter configuration, when a game ball flows down either the left route or the right route, the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505, and when the game ball flows down the other of the left route or the right route. A game ball may be configured to enter the right entrance portion 504 . In other words, it is sufficient that the left entrance portion 505 and the right entrance portion 504 can be separately beaten, and the specific configuration is not particularly limited.

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505 and when the game ball enters the right entrance portion 504, respectively, the notification is performed, and the notification mode in the former case and the latter It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the notification mode is different from that in the case. Alternatively, the notification may be made only when the ball enters either the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504. More specifically, the notification is made only when the ball enters the right entrance portion 504. may be configured to perform These configurations make it easier for the player to grasp which entrance the game ball has entered. In this case, in order to prevent misunderstanding of the notification, it is preferable to also notify that the variable winning device 32 has won a prize.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the suspension information is acquired based on the winning of the respective operation ports 33 and 34, and the suspension information is stored with a predetermined number (four for each) as the upper limit. , may be configured such that the hold information is not stored. Further, the number of pending pieces of pending information based on the prize winning to each operation port 33, 34 may be less than 3, or may be 5 or more. These things are the same also about acquisition of the reservation information based on the prize-winning to the through gate 35 (the reservation information of a normal figure). Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which the upper limit storage number of the pending|holding information based on winning a prize to each operation|movement opening 33 and 34 differs.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game round is executed in the order in which the winning to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 occurs. The game round of the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the game round of the first special symbol based on the winning of the first operation port 33 . In this case, the lottery based on the winning of the second operation opening 34 may be preferentially treated rather than the lottery based on the winning of the first opening 33 . Specifically, a separate jackpot type table is provided for each of the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, and the latter has a large number of rounds and a high frequency support mode. It is preferable that the ratio of the jackpot type to be shifted or the jackpot type with a long duration of the high-frequency support mode is high, and the distribution is more advantageous to the player than the former. Also, the first special symbol game round may be configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol game round. A lottery based on the winning to the mouth 33 may be preferentially treated.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, the total number of game times of the first special figure and the game time of the second special figure reaches the end reference number of times , Although the high-frequency support mode is terminated, the high-frequency support mode may be terminated when the number of times of execution of either the first special figure or the second special figure reaches the end reference number of times. .

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the specific notification is performed by the stop result of the special symbol display unit 43, but the stop result (symbol rows Z1 to Z3 It is good also as a structure which performs specific alerting|reporting by stop combination for big hits in ). In this case, both the stop result of the special figure display unit 43 and the stop result of the display screen G may be configured to perform specific notification, the special figure display unit 43 may be omitted, or the special figure display unit 43 A configuration may be adopted in which the specific notification is not performed and the specific notification is performed only by the stop result of the display screen G.

(12) In the first and second embodiments, the number of types of stop results is three, but it may be four or more or two or less. In addition, the type of stop result (jackpot type) and the aspect of the opening/closing execution mode (setting pattern of the upper limit winning number of each round game) are made to correspond one to one, but one aspect of the opening/closing execution mode (the upper limit number of winning prizes ) may be associated with a plurality of types of stop results. For example, in the first embodiment, for the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B shown in FIG. , the stop result A corresponds to the stop result A, but this may be configured to correspond to a plurality of types of stop results having different display modes. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the upper limit number of prizes from being easily determined from the stop result, and it is possible to favorably secure the game to be enjoyed by predicting the upper limit number of prizes to be won. In this case, the various stop results corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B are the stop results (stop results It is preferable to adopt a configuration that does not overlap (does not have the same display mode) as A and stop result C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the employee of the game hall from being completely unable to determine the maximum winning number from the stop result, and prevent the diversification of the stop result from interfering with the detection of fraud.

In the above case, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C shown in FIG. And, as in the second embodiment, only the stop result C may correspond, or a plurality of types of stop results with different display modes may correspond. That is, in a configuration in which a plurality of opening and closing execution modes (setting patterns for the upper limit winning number of each round game) are provided, in at least one of the opening and closing execution modes, the state of the opening and closing execution mode and the stop result are one-to-many open systems. It is sufficient if the configuration corresponds to In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of stop results correspond to the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result C, each of the various stop results corresponds to a different opening/closing execution mode (for example, the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B). It is preferable to have a configuration that does not overlap with various stop results corresponding to .

This modification can also be applied to the above-described third or fourth embodiment. Multiple types of stop results may be associated with one aspect of the execution mode.

(13) In the above-described first and second embodiments, when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed (the upper limit winning number of the round game in the predetermined round (second round) is 8). ) and when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed (when the upper limit winning number of the round game in the predetermined round (second round) is 4), for example, " It is also possible to display the stop result of the same combination of symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, such as the stop result of the main symbols of 5" lined up on the activated line. Since the symbol display device 41 has a larger display area than the special symbol display unit 43 , it is assumed that general players tend to pay more attention to the symbol display device 41 than the special symbol display unit 43 . Under such a configuration, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible for the employees of the game hall and the skilled players to determine the upper limit winning number from the stop result of the special figure display unit 43, while the symbol display device 41 is exclusively used. It is possible to make it difficult for general players who are playing the game to pay attention to the upper limit winning number from the stop result. As a result, it is possible to favorably harmonize anti-fraud measures and the game to be enjoyed by predicting the upper limit winning number.

In the above case, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed, and the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed. The eyes are stopped or the odd number symbols are more likely to be stopped and displayed than the even number symbols. is likely to be stopped, and the stop result on the display screen G may indicate the expected value of which open/close execution mode (which upper limit winning number). With such a configuration, the player can refer to the stop result on the display screen G when predicting the maximum number of prizes to be won, and the game to be enjoyed by predicting the maximum number of prizes to be won can be favorably enhanced. can.

It should be noted that not only the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C, but all opening and closing execution modes may be targeted, and the jackpot stop result of the same pattern combination may be displayed, or some of the opening and closing execution modes may be targeted. , it may be possible to display the jackpot stop result of the same pattern combination. Further, in all the opening/closing execution modes, the stopping result on the display screen G and the type of the opening/closing execution mode (upper limit prize winning number) may correspond to each other in a one-to-one relationship. This modification can also be applied to the third or fourth embodiment.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit winning number of each round game is diversified in one opening and closing execution mode, but a plurality of opening and closing execution modes are provided in which the upper limit winning number of all round games is unified. , the upper limit winning number may be different between the opening and closing execution modes. For example, the configuration may include an opening/closing execution mode A in which the maximum winning number of all-round games is 8, and an opening/closing execution mode B in which the maximum number of winning prizes in the all-round game is 5. In this case, in the opening/closing execution modes A and B, the aspect of the opening/closing execution mode and the stop result may correspond to each other in a one-to-one relationship. In at least one of the above, the mode of the opening/closing execution mode and the stop result may correspond in a one-to-many relationship.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit winning number of each round game is set after the stop result for the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43 or the display screen G, but the stop result may be configured to set the upper limit winning number of each round game before is stopped and displayed. As such a configuration, for example, a configuration is conceivable in which the upper limit number of winning prizes is set at any timing from the start to the end of a special game round for winning a jackpot.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the upper limit winning number of each round game is set by referring to the information of the determined jackpot type (substantially the result of stopping the special figure display unit 43). , The upper limit winning number of each round game may be set by referring to the predetermined information used for determining the stop result, such as the jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, on the condition that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is one of "20" to "59", the upper limit winning number of the predetermined round (second round) is set to 8, A configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit number of winning prizes in a predetermined round is set to four under the condition that it is one of "60" to "69".

(17) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) with the same maximum winning number of 1 is executed in all rounds, and the upper limit winning. A jackpot notification that is stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 when the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B or the 16R jackpot result C) of which the number is diversified is executed. , and the combination of symbols may indicate the upper limit number of winning prizes. This also applies to the third and fourth embodiments.

For example, when the open/close execution mode with the same upper limit number of winning prizes is executed in all rounds, the symbol combination in which the main symbols of "7" are arranged on the activated line is stopped and displayed, and the upper limit number of winning prizes is diversified. When the open/close execution mode is executed, it is possible to display a combination of symbols in which the main symbols other than "7" are stop-displayed in the combination of doubles on the activated line. At this time, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed, and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed. Doubles of symbols are stopped or doubles of odd-numbered symbols are more likely to be stopped than doubles of even-numbered symbols. Different combinations of main symbols may be statically displayed or easily statically displayed, for example, double eyes may be statically displayed. In addition, the main symbols of the same combination can be stopped and displayed both when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed and when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed. may be In this case, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult to determine the maximum winning number from the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen G.

(18) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 ( However, in a round game in which the maximum winning number is the first number, the variable winning device 32 is opened in the first opening mode, and the maximum winning number is the second number different from the first number. In the round game of the number, the variable winning device 32 may be opened in a second opening mode different from the first opening mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to utilize the opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32 as a suggestive effect of the upper limit number of winning prizes.

(19) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the maximum number of rounds is made common between the jackpot types, but they may be made different. In this case, it is preferable that the maximum number of rounds is larger in the opening/closing execution mode in which the upper limit number of winning prizes is the same in all rounds than in the opening/closing execution mode in which the upper limit number of winning prizes is diversified. If the upper limit number of winning prizes is the same, it becomes easier to complete the open/close execution mode while continuing each round game for a long time. This is because the opportunity for the player to obtain a large number of balls is favorably secured, and it becomes easy to arouse the player's desire to play.

(20) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the upper limit number of winning prizes for all round games is made unidentifiable or difficult to distinguish. good. For example, in each round game from the 1st round to the 5th round, it is conceivable to configure such a configuration that the upper limit number of winning prizes is notified by means of an effect or the like, while such notification is not performed in the round game after the 6th round.

(21) In the first and second embodiments, when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507, the execution of the next round game (round continuation) is given as a privilege. , The privilege may be a transition to a high-probability mode or a high-frequency support mode, or a specific effect may be executed. In this case, in order to establish a game that balances whether to acquire the privilege or to continue the round game in progress for a long time, the round game is terminated in exchange for the award of the privilege, and the next round game is performed. do it. In addition, when the round game ends without satisfying the condition for granting the privilege (when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit winning number), the opening/closing execution mode may be terminated.

(22) In the first and second embodiments, when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V prize sensor 507, a predetermined condition is established and a privilege is granted. The game ball is not limited to passing through the winning sensor 507 . For example, a predetermined lottery process may be executed based on the start of the opening/closing execution mode or the start of the round game, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined condition may be established and a privilege may be awarded. However, from the viewpoint of encouraging active participation in the game, it is preferable that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's operation, rather than the predetermined condition being satisfied only by internal processing. In this case, since the player can participate in the timing when the predetermined condition is established, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she has won the privilege with his/her own skill, and it is possible to suitably increase the willingness to take on the challenge.

(23) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the V winning sensor 507 (the specific area that triggers the establishment of a predetermined condition) is arranged within the variable winning device 32, but the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32 It is good also as a structure arrange|positioned in. In this case, it is preferable to provide a specific area so that the game ball fired with a strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 can reach. Specifically, a specific area is arranged on the upstream side or the downstream side of the variable winning device 32, and the game ball heading toward the variable winning device 32 or the game ball passing through the device 32 without winning the variable winning device 32 is specified. It is preferable to set the position of the specific area so that the area can be reached, or to provide a member that regulates the flow of the game ball, such as a game nail or a guide structure. According to such a configuration, it is possible to establish a predetermined condition while causing the variable winning device 32 to win a game ball, so that it is possible to favorably achieve both a game in the opening/closing execution mode and a game that satisfies the predetermined condition. Become.

(24) In the above-described first embodiment, the specific notification that allows the player to recognize the upper limit winning number is displayed, but for example, the notification is performed auditorily, such as using voice. It is good also as a structure which alert|reports by methods other than a display, such as. Also, in the above-described second embodiment, both the first specific notification and the second specific notification, which makes it easier for the player to recognize the maximum winning number, are displayed. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which notification is performed by a method other than display, such as notification using voice.

(25) In the second embodiment, the first specific notification by the stop result stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43, and the successful round effect DR4 (specific image 604) displayed on the display screen G Although both the second specific notification (the notification that allows the player to more easily recognize the maximum winning number than the first specific notification) is performed, the first specific notification may not be performed. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a successful round effect DR4 (specific image 604) is displayed as a specific notification that allows the player to recognize the maximum winning number.

(26) In the above-described second embodiment, the predetermined condition for informing the upper limit number of prizes (the game ball passing through the detection area of the V prize sensor 507 in the upper limit number of prizes won) is during the open/close execution mode. However, it may be configured to be established in game rounds. For example, when the first stop result is stop-displayed as the jackpot stop result of the special figure display unit 43 or the jackpot stop result of the main symbol stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, or was stop-displayed. In this case, the notification of the maximum winning number is executed, and the notification of the maximum winning number is not executed when the second stop result different from the first stop result is stopped or displayed as the stop result for the jackpot. can be configured. In this case, the upper limit winning number may be notified during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (including the opening period), during the execution of each round game, or during the execution of the game round (stop display of the stop result for the jackpot before).

(27) In the above-described second embodiment, when the notification start condition is established during the round game of a predetermined round, the upper limit winning number is notified at the start of the round game of the next round. and the waiting time (round interval) between the second round and the next round.

(28) In the above-described second embodiment, after the predetermined condition is established, the upper limit number of winning prizes is notified for all remaining round games, but the upper limit winning number is notified only for some round games. may be configured.

(29) In the above-described second embodiment, when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507 at the time of winning the upper limit winning number, the predetermined condition for notifying the upper limit winning number is established. However, the predetermined condition may be established according to other requirements. For example, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the notification, and if the lottery wins a prize, a predetermined condition is established. A configuration is conceivable in which a predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined operation is performed after a notification is given to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation using a performance button operable by the player.

(30) In the above-described second embodiment, the configuration is such that the maximum number of winning prizes is notified for each round, but it may be configured to collectively notify the number of prizes for a plurality of rounds. However, considering the ease of play for the player, the mode of the above embodiment is preferable.

(31) In the above-described second embodiment, the upper limit number of winning prizes is notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied. may be configured.

(32) In the third embodiment, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a during the opening and closing execution mode, after the opening and closing execution mode is finished, the game state of the low probability mode and high frequency support mode (so-called time saving game state), but may be configured to shift to a low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (so-called normal game state). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured without the game state of the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, or may be configured to include the game state. In addition, in the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the game state of the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a during the opening/closing execution mode, the time-saving game state may be entered. , It may be a configuration in which a transition to a normal game state occurs.

In the third embodiment, if the game ball does not pass the falling area 703a during the opening/closing execution mode, the mode shifts to the high probability mode, and if the game ball passes the falling area 703a, the mode does not shift to the high probability mode. , while shifting to the high-probability mode irrespective of the presence or absence of passage, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which advantages and disadvantages occur depending on whether the passage is passed or not. For example, if the game ball does not pass through the falling area 703a during the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, and the game ball falls within the falling area during the opening/closing execution mode. After passing through 703a, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state may be shifted to the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

(33) In the above-described third embodiment, the configuration may be such that the rounds to be opened by the shutter 706 are different depending on the jackpot type. For example, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A, the shutter 706 is opened in the 16th round game, and in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B, the shutter 706 is opened in the 8th round game. may be Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the opening timing of the shutter 706 differs depending on the jackpot type, as in the third embodiment.

(34) In the above-described third embodiment, the game balls distributed to the side different from the falling area 703a side by the shutter 706 can pass through the V prize sensor 705, and the continuation of the round is given as a benefit. However, the privilege may be something other than the continuation of the round, such as a transition to a high probability mode or a high frequency support mode, execution of a specific effect, or the like.

(35) In the third embodiment, the falling area 703a is arranged within the variable winning device 32. However, the falling area 703a is placed in a winning device other than the variable winning device 32. part). In this case, the winning device may or may not be provided with opening/closing means.

(36) In the third embodiment, the falling area 703a is arranged inside the variable winning device 32, but it may be arranged in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32. In this case, as in the third embodiment, if the game ball does not pass through the falling area 703a during the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. , If the game ball passes, the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode may be configured to be the low probability mode. In this case, the falling area 703a may be provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the variable winning device 32 so that the game ball fired with a strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 can reach the falling region 703a. As a result, it is possible to play a game aiming at preventing the game balls from passing through the falling area 703a while causing the game balls to win in the variable winning device 32, and the opening/closing execution mode for winning prize balls by winning in the variable winning device 32. A game and a game of avoiding passage to the falling area 703a to obtain a transition to the high probability mode can be preferably compatible.

In addition, when the falling area 703a is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32, whether or not the game ball passes through the falling region 703a is checked in the process of checking whether the game ball will win the variable winning device 32. There is an advantage that it is possible to visually recognize, and the player can easily grasp whether or not the variable winning device 32 has won a prize and whether or not the falling area 703a has been passed. Conversely, when the falling area 703a is provided downstream of the variable winning device 32, the player predicts the opening timing or opening period of the variable winning device 32 and operates the device 32 without winning the variable winning device 32. A game to be enjoyed by adjusting the shooting timing of the game ball so as not to generate a passing game ball (dropped ball) can be imparted.

Further, when the falling area 703a is arranged in the game area PE, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a in a situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode (situation where the open/close execution mode is not being executed), the lottery mode is the low probability. It is good also as a structure which shifts to a mode (falling). When the high frequency support mode is provided, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a in the situation of the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, the game state is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (so-called time saving game state) It may be configured to shift, or may be configured to shift to a low probability mode and low frequency support mode (so-called normal game state). In this case, the transition to the time-saving gaming state and the transition to the normal gaming state may be switched based on the number of games played at that time. Specifically, if the number of games after shifting to high probability mode and high frequency support mode does not exceed the end reference number of times of high frequency support mode, it moves to the time saving game state, and if it exceeds, normal game It is configured to transition to the state. In addition, in the configuration having the high-frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode. good. Further, when the high frequency support mode is not provided, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it may be configured to shift to the normal game state.

In the above configuration, the falling area 703a is provided upstream or downstream of the starting winning opening (first working opening 33 or second working opening 34), and the game ball fired with a strength that can reach the starting winning opening is It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the falling area 703a can be reached. In order to win the next jackpot in the high-probability mode, the game ball must be shot aiming at the starting prize-winning opening, so the game cannot be played while intentionally avoiding the falling area 703a. can increase the significance of

(37) When the falling area 703a is arranged in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32, the falling area 703a may always be open without providing opening/closing means for opening and closing the falling area 703a.

Further, in the case where the falling area 703a is arranged in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32, opening/closing means for opening and closing the falling area 703a may be provided in the game area PE. In this case, in order to give the impression that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the falling area 703a, the opening width of the opening/closing means provided corresponding to the falling area 703a (horizontal width of the ball entrance) is adjusted to the opening width of the variable winning device 32 ( It is preferable to make it smaller than the width dimension of the big prize winning opening 32a.

The falling area 703a and its opening/closing means may be arranged either on the upstream side or the downstream side of the variable winning device 32. The game ball whose passage is restricted by) can reach the variable winning device 32, while the game ball that has passed through the falling area 703a cannot reach the variable winning device 32. When arranged on the downstream side , the game ball that has not won the variable winning device 32 and has passed through the device 32 can reach the falling area 703a or the arrangement area of the opening and closing means, while the game ball that has won the variable winning device 32 can reach the falling area 703a or It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which it is impossible to reach the arrangement area of the opening/closing means.

(38) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is configured to be switched to the open state in the final round. good too. Further, in the third embodiment, the shutter 706 is switched to the open state in one round in the open/close execution mode, but it may be switched to the open state in two or more rounds. . The same applies to the case where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

(39) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is switched to the open state at the timing when the variable winning device 32 wins the upper limit number of prizes. The timing is not limited to this. For example, the shutter 706 may be configured to open during the round game (for example, at the timing when a predetermined number of winnings less than the upper limit number of winnings occurs). In this case, the shutter 706 is opened during the period in which the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and it is possible to give a game that stirs whether the game ball passes through the falling area 703a during the round game. be possible. Further, as a configuration in which the shutter 706 is opened while the variable prize winning device 32 is open, the elapsed period from the start of the round or the start of the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined period, or the time from the start of the round or the start of the opening/closing execution mode. The shutter 706 may be switched to the open state based on the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times.

In these cases, the open period of the shutter 706 should be shorter than the open period during which the variable prize winning device 32 can be opened in one round or the open period during which the variable prize winning device 32 can be opened once. If the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is open during the whole or most of the opening period of the variable winning device 32, the period in which the player can safely aim at the variable winning device 32 is not ensured, and the variable winning device 32 is hit by the game ball. This is because it is difficult to achieve compatibility with a game in which a player wins a prize ball and wins a prize ball. In addition, when the variable winning device 32 is opened multiple times in one round, if the opening time of each opening is not equal (if at least one opening is different from the opening time of the other one), any opening The opening time of the shutter 706 does not have to be shorter than the opening time.

This modification can also be applied to cases where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

(40) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 is switched to the open state when the game ball passes through the passage portion (winning sensor 702) provided in the variable winning device 32. Alternatively, the shutter 706 may be switched to the open state when the game ball passes through a passing portion provided in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32 . This also applies to the case where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

In the above case, it is preferable that the game ball that has passed through the passing portion is not guided to the rear of the game board 24a, and flows down the game area PE even after passing. In addition, a passing portion outside the variable winning device 32 is arranged upstream or downstream of the variable winning device 32, and a game ball fired with a strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 can reach the passing portion. should be Further, instead of the variable prize winning device 32, it is arranged upstream or downstream of another prize winning portion (for example, the general prize winning port 31) from which prize balls are paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and a strong ball that can reach the other prize winning portion A configuration may be adopted in which a game ball launched at a height can reach the passing portion. Considering the flow of the game in which the opening/closing means is opened by passing through the passing part, it is preferable that the passing part is arranged in the falling area 703a or the upstream side of the opening/closing means.

(41) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 is switched to the open state when the game ball passes through the passing portion (detection area of the winning sensor 702). The shutter 706 may be switched to the open state based on winning. This also applies to the case where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

In the above case, the lottery process for opening/closing the shutter 706 may be executed separately from the lottery process (transition determination) for opening/closing the variable prize winning device 32 in order to avoid player confusion. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the result of the lottery process for opening and closing the shutter 706 . The notification in this case may be performed by the display unit (the special figure display unit or the display screen G of the design display device 41) that notifies the result of the shift determination, or may be performed by a separate display unit. Note that the latter configuration is preferable in order to distinguish it from the shift determination notification.

(42) In the above-described third embodiment, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a, a lottery process (falling lottery) for determining whether the game state should be shifted to the time-saving game state or the normal game state is performed. It may be configured to be executed, and when the result of the lottery is a winning result, the state is shifted to the time-saving game state or the normal game state. For example, in the configuration in which the game ball falls immediately after passing through the falling area 703a as in the third embodiment, the falling area 703a may be lost if the falling occurs too frequently. Inevitably, the passing frequency of the falling area 703a has to be suppressed to some extent, and accordingly, there is an aspect that the presence of the falling area 703a is weakened. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the game ball passes through the falling area 703a, it does not fall immediately, so the frequency of the game ball passing through the falling area 703a can be increased. As a result, the opportunity for the player to pay attention to the falling area 703a is expanded, and the presence of the falling area 703a can be favorably appealed.

In addition, the number of passing game balls in the falling area 703a from the start of the round game or the start of the opening and closing execution mode (the number of passes) reaches a predetermined number of times, and the game state is changed to the time saving game state or normal game. A configuration may be adopted in which the state is changed or the lottery process described above is performed.

Note that the falling area 703a is assumed not only to function as a direct trigger for falling as in the third embodiment, but also to function as a trigger for a fall lottery as in this modified example. It can also be called a usage area. In addition, this modification can also be applied to cases where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

(43) In the third embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passing portion (the detection area of the winning sensor 702), a lottery process is executed to determine whether the shutter 706 is to be opened. is the winning result, the shutter 706 may be opened. Further, the shutter 706 may be opened based on the number of game balls passing through the passing portion (the number of times of passing) from the start of the round game or the start of the opening/closing execution mode reaching a predetermined number of times. good. The same applies to the case where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

(44) In the above-described third embodiment, the prize balls may be paid out when the game balls pass through the falling area 703a. This also applies to the case where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

(45) In the above-described third embodiment, the shutter 706 is configured to open only once based on one trigger, but it may be configured to open the shutter 706 multiple times based on one trigger. This also applies to the case where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

In the above case, after performing short-term opening with a relatively short opening period at least once, long-term opening with a relatively long opening period may be performed at least once. This is because the player's attention to the falling area 703a can be attracted by utilizing the aforementioned short-term release as a suggestion or indication that the game ball will easily pass through the falling area 703a. In this case, the opening period for one time in the short-term opening is preferably shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec) in order to suppress the game ball from passing through the falling area 703a during the execution of the opening. . Also, in both the short-term opening and the long-term opening, it is preferable to shorten the opening period of the variable winning device 32 for one round or one time as described in (39) above.

(46) In the above third embodiment, in the case of a specific jackpot, even if the game ball passes through the falling region 703a, it does not fall, and the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and another specific In the case of a big hit, when the game ball passes through the falling area 703a, the lottery mode may fall to the low probability mode. For example, the specific jackpot is the initial jackpot (jackpot won in the normal gaming state), and the other specific jackpot is the jackpot in the series (jackpot won in the high-probability mode or high-frequency support mode). A configuration can be considered. By adopting such a configuration, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode without obtaining an opportunity to play the game in the high probability mode even though the probability variable jackpot has been drawn in the first prize. It becomes possible to suppress it suitably.

In this case, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (for the start winning opening that wins in the left hand) and a jackpot classification table for the second special figure (for the starting opening that wins in the right hand) are separately provided, The former jackpot type table defines the probability variable jackpot result and the normal jackpot result (non-probability variable jackpot result), while the latter jackpot type table defines only the probability variable jackpot result (in other words, the jackpot There may be no distinction between probability variation and non-probability variation in the result). According to such a configuration, by winning the probability variable jackpot at the first hit (jackpot under the left-handed gaming state), the system shifts to the high probability mode, and in the high-probability mode (right-handed gaming state), As long as the game ball does not pass through the falling area 703a, it is possible to realize a game property in which the high probability mode continues. It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the falling area 703a or its opening/closing means is provided in the game area PE in (36) and (37) above.

(47) In the third embodiment, the first variable winning device without the falling area 703a and the second variable winning device with the falling area 703a may be provided. In this case, as aspects of the opening/closing execution mode, a plurality of aspects including a first aspect in which the first variable winning device is controlled to open and close and a second aspect in which the second variable winning device is controlled to open and close are provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one of the open/close execution modes is executed by allocating . In addition, in the case of the first win (in the case of the first special prize jackpot), the opening and closing execution mode of only the first mode (opening and closing execution mode not including the round in which the second variable winning device is controlled to open and close) is executed. In the case of a jackpot during Shochu (in the case of a second special prize jackpot), the opening and closing execution mode of only the second mode or the opening and closing execution mode including the second mode (including a round in which the second variable winning device is controlled to open and close) It may be configured to execute the opening/closing execution mode).

(48) In the above-described third embodiment, the passage portion that guides the game ball that has passed through the detection area (first area) of the winning sensor 702 to the falling area 703a (second area) is formed by a continuous wall extending in the vertical direction. However, at least a part of the passage may be formed by a game nail. However, in this case, variation occurs in the movement speed of the game ball, etc., and in relation to the period in which the shutter 706 is in the open state, the passing ball in the first area that triggered the opening of the shutter 706 passes through the second area. It is assumed that there will be cases where it does or does not, and the behavior becomes unstable. In view of this point, it is preferable to form the entire passage portion with a continuous wall as in the third embodiment. In this case, as a result of suppressing variations in the moving speed of the game ball, the time required for the game ball to reach the second area after passing through the first area can be stabilized, and the shutter 706 is opened. It is possible to construct a configuration in which the ball passing through the first area stably passes through the second area.

(49) In the above-described third embodiment, the passage portion (right vertical passage portion 850) through which the game ball that has passed through the detection area (first area) of the winning sensor 702 passes. It may be configured to have a means capable of decelerating the moving speed or stopping the game ball within the passage. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 , a plurality of protrusions 851 that protrude inward of the right vertical passage 850 are formed on the inner wall surface of the right vertical passage 850 . These projecting portions 851 are arranged along the moving direction of the game ball, and each projecting portion 851 is formed to extend in the width direction of the right vertical passage portion 850 . The respective projecting portions 851 are provided dispersedly in the front and rear or left and right on the inner wall surface portion of the right vertical passage portion 850, and are arranged so as to be alternately positioned.

When the game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 passes through the first area, the game ball comes into contact with each projecting portion 851, thereby slowing down the moving speed of the game ball. In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(b), since a meandering route 852 is formed by each projecting portion 851, the game ball that has passed through the first area moves the distance until it reaches the falling area 703a (second area). is longer than the linear distance L between the first and second regions. As a result, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the first area to reach the second area becomes longer, and the passing ball in the first area that triggered the opening of the shutter 706 stably passes through the second area. can be made In this case, since the straight line distance L can be shortened, the passage structure on the back side of the variable prize winning device 32 can be easily arranged compactly, and a suitable configuration can be achieved in a game machine with a limited installation area for game parts.

Since contact with each protrusion 851 is expected to reduce speed to some extent, each protrusion 851 may be provided in a manner in which the meandering route 852 is not formed.

(50) The variable winning device 32 according to the third embodiment may be configured to include a passage structure 860 shown in FIG. The passage structure 860 is arranged behind it so as to communicate with the passage portion 502 (FIG. 7(a)), and the game ball entered into the right entrance portion 504 flows thereinto. The passage structure 860 includes a first passage portion 861 in which the prize winning sensor 702 is arranged, a second passage portion 862 to which the game ball passing through the detection area (first region) of the prize winning sensor 702 is guided, and a second passage portion. A third passage portion 863 is provided on the downstream side of 862 and in which the V winning sensor 705 is arranged. The second passage portion 862 extends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction of the gaming machine), and an opening portion 864 opening downward is formed in the bottom portion 862a. A fall winning sensor 703 is arranged below the opening 864 to form a fall area 703a (second area).

A shutter 865 is arranged above the falling winning sensor 703 so as to be able to close the opening 864 . The shutter 865 is held so that the pachinko machine 10 can slide in the front-rear direction. In other words, the shutter 865 can be displaced between a projecting position (closed position) that projects forward to close the opening 864 and a retracted position (open position) that retracts from the projecting position to open the opening 864 . .

As shown in FIG. 59(a), when the shutter 865 is arranged at the projecting position, the opening 864 is closed, and the bottom 862a of the second passage 862 is formed at the opening 864 by the shutter 865. , the game ball from the first passage portion 861 moves on the shutter 865 . As a result, the game ball from the first passage portion 861 is guided to the third passage portion 863 and can pass through the detection area of the V prize sensor 705 . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59(b), when the shutter 865 is arranged at the retracted position, the opening 864 is opened and the game ball from the first passage 861 passes through the second passage 862. to fall downwards. As a result, the game ball from the first passage portion 861 is guided to the fall prize sensor 703 side, and can pass through the fall area 703a.

Further, the shutter 865 is connected to the drive unit 707 in the same manner as the shutter 706 according to the third embodiment, and is normally arranged at the projecting position (closed position), and is set at a predetermined switching timing (for example, opening/closing execution). When it comes to the timing when the upper limit number of prizes is won in the final round in the mode, it is driven and controlled to be displaced to the retracted position (open position).

In the above configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first area is guided to the second passage portion 862 extending in the horizontal direction, compared to the case where the game ball falls in the right vertical passage portion 701 extending in the vertical direction, the amount of the game ball is reduced. You can slow down your movement speed. Further, the bottom portion 862a of the second passage portion 862 is opened and closed by the shutter 865 to drop the game ball downward and lead it to the second area. In this case, if the shutter 865 is displaced to the open position before the game ball from the first passage portion 861 reaches the downstream end portion 865b of the shutter 865, the game ball can be guided to the second region, so the shutter The passing ball A in the first area that triggered the opening of 865 can be allowed to pass through the second area with a margin. As a result, the passing ball A can be more stably guided to the second area, and the game ball is prevented from passing through the second area after seeing that the game ball that triggers the opening has passed through the first area. It is possible to suppress the action to be attempted more appropriately.

Further, in the above configuration, means may be provided to reduce the moving speed of the game ball moving on the upper surface portion 865a of the shutter 865 or to stop the game ball on the upper surface portion 865a. As such a configuration, a configuration in which a plurality of projecting portions are provided on the upper surface portion 865a or on the inner wall surface portion of the second passage portion 862 is conceivable. With such a configuration, depending on the degree of deceleration or stagnation, not only the passing ball A that triggered the release, but also the passing ball ahead of the passing ball A can be guided to the second area. As a result, even if the player tries to avoid passage to the second area after seeing that the game ball serving as the opening trigger has passed through the first area, it will be too late, and such an avoidance action will be suppressed more reliably. it becomes possible to

In the above configuration, the second passage portion 862 extends in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10, but may extend in the front-rear direction. Further, the shutter 865 is not limited to one that slides as long as it can open the opening 864 and form the bottom 862a in the closed state. 864 may be opened and closed. Also, the second passage portion 862 does not necessarily have to be horizontal, and may be inclined downward toward the third passage portion 863 (V winning sensor 705).

(51) In the above-described third embodiment, since the opening period (1 sec) of the shutter 706 is longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), the shutter 706 is opened after the passing ball that triggered the opening of the shutter 706. A passing ball that has passed through the first area (detection area of the winning sensor 702) can pass through the second area (falling area 703a), but the passing ball that triggered the release of the passing balls in the first area is released after the passing ball. A configuration may be adopted in which a passing ball that has passed through one area is restricted from passing through the second area (impossible or difficult to pass through). As such a configuration, it is conceivable to make the open period of the shutter 706 shorter than the shooting period of the game ball, or to switch the shutter 706 to the closed state on the condition that the game ball has passed through the second area. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to more preferably suppress aggressive actions.

It should be noted that each configuration of (48) to (51) above detects the game ball passing through the detection area (first area) of the winning sensor 702 in the fourth embodiment. It is also possible to apply the configuration leading to the second area). In this case, it is possible to preferably suppress the act of adjusting the shooting mode of the game ball so as to pass the game ball through the second area after seeing that the game ball, which is the opening trigger, has passed through the first area. Become.

(52) In the fourth embodiment, the first privilege is to continue the round, and the second privilege is to switch to the high-probability mode. It is not limited. For example, as the first benefit or the second benefit, the support mode may shift to the high-frequency support mode, a specific effect may be executed, or a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out. In this case, round continuation may be granted as the first benefit, and benefits other than the transition to the high probability mode may be granted as the second benefit, or benefits other than the round continuation may be granted as the first benefit, and the second benefit may be configured to give a transition to the high-probability mode.

(53) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the high-probability V area 803a in the round game of the fifth round, the fifth effect DR5 is executed in the round game of the tenth round. , the first effect DR1 may be executed again. In other words, the player may select which route to launch the game ball without notifying which route the game ball should be aimed at.

(54) In the fourth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the right entrance portion 504 in the round in which the shutter 865 is driven in a high allocation mode, the round continues (first privilege) and the high probability mode Although both the transition (second privilege) and the transition (second privilege) are provided, the configuration may be such that only the latter is provided.

(55) In the fourth embodiment, the high accuracy V winning sensor 803, the second passage portion 804, the discharge sensor 805, the third passage portion 806 and the continuous V winning sensor 807 are omitted, and the left entrance portion 505 (the second 1 area), the first internal processing (control processing) that gives the first privilege based on the passage of the game ball, and the first game situation (for example, during the execution of the 5th round round game), the right side The second privilege is given based on the game ball passing through the entrance part 504 (first area), and the right entrance part 504 is opened under the second game situation (for example, during the execution of the 10th round game). It is good also as a structure provided with the 2nd internal processing (control processing) which does not give a 1st privilege and a 2nd privilege, even if a game ball passes. That is, the configuration in which the awarding mode of the privilege when the game ball passes through the second area changes depending on the game situation at the time of passage is not necessarily limited to the movement of the game ball, and the internal control of the game machine It may be realized by processing.

(56) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters the machine to give a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahjong ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on the effective line visible through the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the pachinko machine and the slot machine are provided with a take-in device, and start rotation of the reels by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, special game state transition means ( a function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81;
A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Switching control means for executing switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81); ,
with
The special game state has a configuration in which a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times,
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means during execution of the round game, round game end means (large Equipped with a function to execute the winning opening opening and closing process),
The mode of the special game state includes a first round game in which the specific number is the first number (8) (first round round game in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B), A second round game (a second round game in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) in which the specific number is a second number (four) different from the first number A game machine characterized by including a mode of including in a game state.

In the above configuration, when the result of the transition determination becomes the result of transition correspondence, the transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player, and in the special game state, switching control is performed to set the variable ball entry means to the first state. A round game is executed over a plurality of times. In addition, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for ending the round game, is determined, and when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the specific number, each round game ends. ing. Under such a configuration, in one special game state, a first round game in which the specific number as the end condition of the round game is the first number, and a second round game in which the specific number is the second number A round game is provided, and the specific number of each round game is diversified. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the specific number of each round game, and a game to be enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game can be provided. This suppresses the monotony of the game during the special game state, and makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. If a predetermined condition (occurrence of a V prize) is established during the execution of the round game, a privilege granting means (step S615 by the main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege (round continuation or the right) to the player function to execute the processing of
The round game ending means, when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the round game or when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entering means is the specified number. Regardless of whether or not the number has been reached, it is characterized by having a means for terminating the round game being executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S610 to S612 by the main control device 81). The gaming machine described in A1.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of a round game, a privilege is obtained, but even if the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means does not reach a specific number, the round game is performed. ends. In other words, if the predetermined condition is established early in the round game, the round game ends early. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the timing when a specific number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or at a timing close to it, the round game can be continued for a long time and benefits can be obtained. be ideal. In this case, since the specific number of each round game is diversified, it is not uniform how many hits correspond to the specific number, and the timing at which the ideal predetermined conditions are met fluctuates. become a thing. Therefore, it is possible not only to predict the specific number, but also to expect that the predetermined condition will be satisfied at the ideal timing. Therefore, each round game can be made much more interesting than when the round game is simply digested, and the game during the special game state can be greatly excited.

Feature A3. Characteristic A2 characterized in that the special game state is terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches the specific number without the predetermined condition being satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, while the specific number of each round game is diversified, when the predetermined condition is established at the timing when the specific number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or at a timing close to it, the round game is started. While it is possible to continue the special game state (execute the next round game) while continuing for a long time, the special game state ends when a predetermined condition is not satisfied before a specific number of balls are entered. A game can be given. As a result, it is possible to increase the amusement of the game in which the specific number is predicted and the predetermined condition is established at the timing of the ball entry corresponding to the prediction result or at a timing close thereto, and the game in the special game state is greatly excited. becomes possible.

Feature A4. Equipped with an operation means (shooting handle 60) that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the predetermined condition can be established based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined condition is established based on the player's operation, the player can be involved in the establishment timing of the predetermined condition. As a result, as compared with the case of only looking at whether or not a predetermined condition is established, it is possible to enhance the interest of each round game and to encourage active participation in the game.

Feature A5. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation is provided,
A specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) is provided so that the game ball fired in a manner that can reach the variable ball entry means can reach,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the predetermined condition is established when a game ball passes through or reaches the specific area.

Under the special game state, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Since the area is configured so that the game ball fired in a manner that can reach the variable ball entry means can reach, when the predetermined condition is established and the privilege is obtained, the round game ends, and when the predetermined There is a case where the round game ends without the condition being established, and it is possible to draw attention to whether the predetermined condition should be established in the relationship between the prize balls corresponding to the remaining number up to the specific number and the privilege. As a result, it becomes possible to liven up the game during the special game state, as compared with only the case where the special game state is digested indifferently.

Feature A6. The specific area is provided within the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can reach the specific area.

According to the above configuration, the points of interest of the player are aggregated, and whether or not the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means and whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area ) can be viewed without moving the line of sight. As a result, overlooking whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable ball entry means or the specific area is suppressed, and the player can easily play the game.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein the predetermined condition can be established by a predetermined ball entering the variable ball entering means.

Under the special game state, the player normally shoots the game ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. There are cases where the round game ends without the condition being established, and it is possible to draw attention to whether the predetermined condition should be established in relation to the prize balls corresponding to the remaining number up to the specific number and the privilege. As a result, it becomes possible to liven up the game during the special game state, as compared with only the case where the special game state is digested indifferently.

Feature A8. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation is provided,
When the game ball shot by the shooting means passes through the specific area (the detection area of the V winning sensor 507) or reaches the specific area, the predetermined condition is established,
When the game ball is shot by the first shooting operation (the operation of shooting the game ball with the strength to enter the right entrance portion 504), the game ball can reach or is likely to reach the specific area, and the first shooting operation When the game ball is shot by a second shooting operation different from (the operation of shooting the game ball with the strength to enter the left entrance portion 505), the game ball cannot reach the specific area or in the case of the first shooting operation The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A7, characterized in that it is configured to be harder to reach.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passed through the specific area, so that the player can determine the timing at which the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the player predicts a specific number and generates a predetermined condition at the timing corresponding to the prediction result. In this case, if the continuation of the round is prioritized and the predetermined condition is established at an early timing, the total number of prize balls to be obtained is reduced even if the special game state can be completed. On the other hand, if the timing of fulfillment of the predetermined condition is extended to the last minute in order to increase the number of prize balls in one round of the round game, the result is that the special game state ends prematurely. In other words, it is possible to provide a so-called chicken race-like game in which courage is tested after predicting a specific number of games in each round. As a result, the interest in playing the game by predicting the specific number of each round game is preferably increased, and the interest in the special game state can be greatly improved.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising guide means (guide passage portion 401) for guiding the game ball shot by the first shooting operation to the specific area.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible to stably guide the launched game ball to the specific area, when the player predicts the specific number and adjusts the timing at which the predetermined condition is established, the player's It is possible to make it easier to establish a predetermined condition at a targeted timing.

Feature A10. The game ball is configured to be able to reach the variable ball entry means both when the game ball is shot by the first shooting operation and when the game ball is shot by the second shooting operation. The gaming machine according to feature A8 or feature A9, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area while allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means, and not allowing the game ball to pass therethrough. In other words, it is possible to suitably suppress the loss of the original game in the special game state, such as a decrease in the ball-entering rate to the variable ball-entering means, in adjusting the timing at which the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, the game in the special game state and the game in which the specific number is predicted and the timing of establishment of the predetermined condition can be adjusted in a suitable manner. can be done.

Feature A11. A first area as the specific area and a second area (detection area of the winning sensor 509) different from the first area are provided in the variable ball entry means,
The game ball launched by the first shooting operation enters the variable ball entering means, can pass through the first area or can reach the first area, and is launched by the second shooting operation A ball enters the variable ball entry means and can pass through the second area or reach the second area,
Characteristic A10, characterized in that it is configured so that a game ball that has passed through or reached the second area cannot pass through the first area or cannot reach the first area. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it a preferable aspect in adjusting the establishment timing of the predetermined condition while allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means. In addition, by consolidating the points of interest, it is possible to prevent overlooking whether the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means or whether the game ball has passed through the first area (specific area), thereby making it easier for the player to play the game. can be done.

Feature A12. The variable ball entry means has a ball entry section (large winning opening 32a) into which a game ball can enter when the variable ball entry means is at least in the first state,
The ball entry portion has a horizontally long shape,
A first entrance portion (right entrance portion 504) communicating with the first area is provided on one side in the left-right direction of the game machine in the ball entry portion, and a second entrance portion communicating with the second area is provided on the other side. An entrance (left entrance 505) is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein a partition (partition 511) is provided between the first entrance and the second entrance.

According to the above configuration, the ball-entering portion of the variable ball-entering means is horizontally long, and the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are provided on both left and right sides thereof. becomes easier to do. Furthermore, since the partition is provided between the first entrance and the second entrance, the game ball is suppressed from moving to the entrance on the opposite side in the ball entrance. As a result, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the game ball passes through the second area even though the first shooting operation is performed aiming at the first area is suppressed, and the player's shooting operation determines the timing at which a predetermined condition is established. It can be a preferred mode in terms of making it adjustable.

Feature A13. Any of the features A1 to A12, characterized in that the specific number of at least one round game among the round games that can be executed in the special game state can be prevented from being notified. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, since the specific number of each round game is diversified, the specific number of each round game can be configured to be unrecognizable or difficult for the player to recognize. It is possible to enhance the game of predicting the.

Feature A14. As the mode of the special game state, the first mode (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) including the first round game and the second round game, and the first mode are different from the above. A plurality of types of modes including a first round game and a second mode (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C) including the second round game are provided,
The special game state transition means, when the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special game state in one of the special game states of a plurality of types Equipped with means for shifting (function for executing setting processing for each round by main controller 81),
In the special game state of the first mode and the special game state of the second mode, the specific number in the round game of a predetermined round (second round) is different. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the above configuration, even if the round game is the same round, the specific number differs depending on the mode of the special game state, so the specific number of each round game becomes more difficult to understand from the player's point of view, and the specific number of each round game is predicted. It becomes possible to strengthen the fun to play.

Feature A15. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, special game state transition means ( a function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81;
A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Switching control means for executing switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81); ,
with
The special game state has a configuration in which a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times,
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means during execution of the round game, round game end means (large Equipped with a function to execute the winning opening opening and closing process),
The mode of the special game state includes a first mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result B) and a second mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result C) different from the first mode. Multiple types of modes are provided,
The special game state transition means, when the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special game state in one of the special game states of a plurality of types Equipped with means for shifting (function for executing setting processing for each round by main controller 81),
A gaming machine, wherein the specific number in the round game of a predetermined round (second round) is different between the special game state of the first mode and the special game state of the second mode. .

In the above configuration, when the result of the transition determination becomes the result of transition correspondence, the transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player, and in the special game state, switching control is performed to set the variable ball entry means to the first state. A round game is executed over a plurality of times. In addition, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for ending the round game, is determined, and when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the specific number, each round game ends. ing. Under such a configuration, a plurality of types of modes are provided as modes of the special game state, and the specific number differs depending on the mode of the special game state even in the same round of the round game. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the specific number of each round game, and a game to be enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game can be provided. This suppresses the monotony of the game during the special game state, and makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that each configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A14 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature A16. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, special game state transition means ( a function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81;
A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Switching control means for executing switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81); ,
with
The special game state has a configuration in which a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times,
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means during execution of the round game, round game end means (large A function to execute the opening and closing process of the winning opening),
Specific number setting means for setting the specific number (function for executing setting processing for each round by the main controller 81);
with
The round game ending means terminates the round game being executed when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches the specified number set by the specified number setting means. ,
The specific number setting means is
a first means for setting a first number (eight) as the specific number;
a second means for setting a second number (four) different from the first number as the specific number;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the result of the transition determination becomes the result of transition correspondence, the transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player, and in the special game state, switching control is performed to set the variable ball entry means to the first state. A round game is executed over a plurality of times. In addition, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for ending the round game, is determined, and when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the specific number, each round game ends. ing. Under such a configuration, there are cases where the specific number of each round game is set to the first number, and there are cases where it is set to a second number different from the first number, and the specific number of each round game is varied. has been made Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the specific number of each round game, and a game to be enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game can be provided. This suppresses the monotony of the game during the special game state, and makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that each configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A14 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the features A1 to A16 is "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, There is known a system in which a transition is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention of the industry.”

In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A16, the technical techniques shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, special game state transition means ( a function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81;
A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Switching control means for executing switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81); ,
with
The special game state is configured such that a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times,
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means during execution of the round game, round game end means (large A function to execute the opening and closing process of the winning opening),
Specific number setting means for setting the specific number (function for executing setting processing for each round by the main controller 81);
with
The specific number setting means is
a first means for setting a first number (eight) as the specific number;
a second means for setting a second number (four) different from the first number as the specific number;
with
The configuration is characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific notification (winning pattern, successful round effect DR4) that allows the player to recognize the specific number set by the specific number setting means or set. game machine.

In this configuration, when the result of the transition determination becomes the result of transition correspondence, the transition is made to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and in the special game state, switching control is performed to set the variable ball entry means to the first state. A round game is executed over a plurality of times. In addition, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for ending the round game, is determined, and when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the specific number, each round game ends. ing. Under such a configuration, there are cases where the specific number of each round game is set to the first number, and there are cases where it is set to a second number different from the first number, and the specific number of each round game is varied. has been made This suppresses the monotony of the game during the special game state, and makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the specific information that the player can recognize is performed, it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion due to the non-uniform specific number.

Feature B2. Predetermined display means for starting variable display of patterns based on the transition determination by the transition determination means and stop-displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43, symbol display device 41) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by main control device 81) for executing the game round,
having a plurality of types of transition response stop results (hit symbols) as the stop results corresponding to the transition response results;
The specific number setting means determines the type of the result of the transition-response stop displayed or stopped on the predetermined display means, or the transition-response stop result stop-displayed or stopped-displayed on the predetermined display means. The specific number is set in correspondence with the predetermined information (jackpot type counter C2) used to determine the type of result,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific notification is executed by the stop display of the result of the stoppage corresponding to transition.

In the above configuration, the specific number is not directly notified, but only indirect notification using the transition support stop result. For this reason, it is not possible for anyone to easily find out the specific number, and it is possible to suitably suppress excessive hindrance to the game that is enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game. In particular, it is possible to determine the specific number from the stop result only when the player fully understands the correspondence between the type of stop result and the specific number of each round game. This provides an opportunity to deepen one's interest in and knowledge of the gaming machine, which in turn can lead to arousal of motivation to play the game.

In addition, such a configuration can effectively function as an anti-fraud measure. For example, in the event of a fraudulent act in which the gaming machine operates with a specific number different from the specific number set legally, an employee of the gaming hall visually confirms the stop result on the predetermined display means, It becomes possible to discriminate a specific number of mismatches. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the early detection of fraud.

Feature B3. The specified number setting means determines whether the stop result for transition corresponding to the stopped or displayed stop result is a first stop result for transition (stop result B), or when the predetermined information is the first result for transition corresponding stop. If the first predetermined information corresponding to (jackpot type counter C2 which is any value of "20" to "59"), the specific number in the round game of the predetermined round (second round) When the first number is reached, and the result of stoppage corresponding to transition that is stop-displayed or is stop-displayed is a second result of stoppage corresponding to transition (stop result C) different from the first result of stoppage corresponding to transition, or the predetermined If the information is the second predetermined information corresponding to the second transition corresponding stop result (jackpot type counter that is any value of "60" to "69"), in the round game of the predetermined round The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the specific number is set to be the second number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the transition-responsive stop result stop-displayed on the predetermined display means with the upper limit winning number of each round game, and the stop display of the transition-responsive stop result appropriately functions as a specific notification. It becomes possible to let

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein at least the first transition-corresponding stop result has a plurality of types of stop results with different display modes.

According to the above configuration, since the first number as the specific number and the result of the suspension for the first transition correspond in a one-to-many relationship, it is difficult to determine the specific number (the first number) from the result of the suspension for the first transition. degree can be increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific number of stop results from becoming easy to determine, and it is possible to favorably guarantee games to be enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game.

It should be noted that this feature is defined as "having a plurality of types of first suspension results with different display modes as the first transition-based suspension results, and having the plurality of types of first suspension results as the second migration-based suspension results. It is characterized by having a plurality of types of second stop results that do not overlap and have different display modes. In this configuration, even in the second migration suspension result, the specific number corresponds to the migration suspension result in a one-to-many relationship, so the difficulty of determining the specific number from the migration suspension result can be further increased. . In addition, since the various stop results that are the result of the stop corresponding to the second transition and the various stop results that are the result of the stop corresponding to the first transition do not overlap, the employees of the game hall cannot distinguish the specific number from the stop result at all. is suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the diversification of suspension results from interfering with fraud detection.

Feature B5. A second display means (symbol display device 41) provided separately from the predetermined display means (special figure display unit 43) and having a larger display area than the predetermined display means (symbol display device 41);
Display control means (effect control) for controlling the second display means to variably display a second pattern different from the pattern on the second display means and to stop and display a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination a function of controlling the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 by the device 82 and the display control device 212;
with
The display control means, when the specific number in the round game of the predetermined round (second round) is the first number, and the specific number in the round game of the predetermined round (second round) The gaming machine according to feature B3 or B4, further comprising means capable of displaying the same stop result as the stop result of the second pattern in both cases where the number of symbols is the second number.

Since the second display means has a larger display area than the predetermined display means, it is conspicuous, so it is assumed that general players tend to pay more attention to the second display means than the predetermined display means. Under such a configuration, the stop result and the specific number are associated on the predetermined display means, and the stop result that does not correspond to the specific number is displayed on the second display means. For employees and skilled players, it is possible to determine the specific number from the result of stopping the predetermined display means, while for general players who are playing games focusing exclusively on the second display means, the specific number from the result of stopping. can be made difficult to distinguish. As a result, it is possible to harmonize anti-fraud measures and a game to be enjoyed by predicting a specific number.

Feature B6. When a predetermined condition is established, it is characterized by having a notification executing means (a function of executing a round start process by the effect control device 82) that executes the specific notification (effect DR4 for a successful round). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed when the predetermined condition is established, the specific number of each round game may or may not be notified. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that can be enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game, while suppressing the player's confusion due to the diversification of the specific number.

In addition, when applying this feature to any of the above features B2 to B5, "as the specific notification, the first specific notification (winning pattern) and the player selecting the specific number rather than the first specific notification It is possible to execute a second specific notification (effect DR4 for a successful round) that is easy to recognize, and is configured so that at least the stop display of the transition corresponding stop result can be the first specific notification. It can also be expressed as "the notification executing means executes the second specific notification when a predetermined condition is satisfied". This also applies to features B7 to B15 below.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the predetermined condition can be established in the special game state.

According to the above configuration, not only the game in which the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means in the special game state to obtain the prize ball, but also the game in which the predetermined condition is established in the special game state and the specific notification is executed. can be granted. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is not limited to just entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means, and it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game during the special game state.

Feature B8. The predetermined condition is based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means (V winning) or a specific event based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means (a lottery process executed by the entry of a ball) The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized in that it can be established based on the occurrence of a winning result.

According to the above configuration, while playing the special game state, it is possible to establish the predetermined condition while allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means. Therefore, a game in which a game ball is entered into the variable ball-entering means and a game in which a predetermined condition is established and a specific notification is executed can be preferably made compatible. It can be a preferred embodiment.

Feature B9. A specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass is provided in the variable ball entry means,
The predetermined condition is that the specific number of game balls among the game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the round game pass through the specific area, or the specific number of game balls pass through the specific area. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is established based on passage through the specific area.

Since the specific number of each round game is diversified, it is not easy to pass the specific number of game balls through the specific area, and the degree of difficulty of fulfilling the predetermined condition can be increased. For example, if the degree of difficulty in fulfilling the predetermined condition is low and the execution of the notification is simple, there is a possibility that the significance of diversifying the specific number and allowing the player to predict will be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, since the difficulty is increased, the situation where the notification is not achieved occurs with a certain frequency. can be reconciled.

Feature B10. Predetermined display means for starting variable display of patterns based on the transition determination by the transition determination means and stop-displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43, symbol display device 41) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by main control device 81) for executing the game round,
As the stop result, the transition correspondence stop result (winning pattern) corresponding to the transition correspondence result includes a first transition correspondence stop result (first stop result) and a second transition correspondence different from the first transition correspondence stop result. A plurality of types including the stop result (second stop result) are set,
The notification executing means executes the specific notification when the first result of suspension corresponding to transition is displayed as the suspension result or when the result of suspension corresponding to transition is displayed as the suspension result, and the second result of suspension corresponding to transition is suspended as the suspension result. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized by comprising means for not executing the specific notification when it is displayed or when it is statically displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the transition determination is the result of the transition correspondence, the specific notification is executed and the player can know the specific number of each round game, and the specific notification is executed. In some cases, the player may have no choice but to predict the specific number of games played each round. Therefore, in the game before shifting to the special game state, the game can be played with the aim of stopping the display of the stop result corresponding to the first transition, and not only the special game state but also the game before shifting to the special game state can be played. It is also possible to increase interest in

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein the notification executing means comprises means for executing the specific notification in the special game state.

In the above configuration, while the specific number of each round game is diversified, since the specific number of each round game is notified in real time, it is possible to make a notification beneficial to the player, and the interest in the specific notification can be increased. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature B12. The special game state includes a waiting period for waiting for the start of the next round game with the variable ball-entering means set to the second state after one round game is completed,
The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the notification executing means comprises means for executing the specific notification at least during the standby period.

Since the variable ball entry means is in the second state during the standby period, by performing the specific notification during the period, attention is not deprived of whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. You can see and hear notifications. Therefore, overlooking of the specific information can be suitably suppressed, and the player can easily grasp the specific number of each round game through the specific information.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the specific notification includes notification that allows the player to recognize the specific number of the next round game.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific number of the round game before the start of the round game, and the player can be notified with high convenience.

Feature B14. The notification executing means comprises means for executing the specific notification in the special game state in which the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined condition is established during the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature B13.

In the above configuration, under the configuration in which the specific number of each round game is diversified, notification is performed by establishing a predetermined condition in the special game state, and the specific number of each round game in the special game state It is possible to provide a game to grasp. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is not limited to just entering a game ball into the variable ball entering means, and it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game during the special game state.

Feature B15. The notification execution means is means for executing the specific notification so that the player can recognize the specific number of the round games to be executed after the round in which the predetermined condition is established or after the round in which the predetermined condition is established. The gaming machine according to feature B14, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific number of round games after the round in which the predetermined condition is established or after the round is notified, the earlier the predetermined condition is established in the special game state, the more the specific number of round games. becomes possible to know As a result, it is possible to impart the enjoyment of playing the game with the aim of establishing the predetermined condition as soon as possible, and it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game during the special game state.

Feature B16. The variable ball entry means is provided with a specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) through which the game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass,
In the special game state, when a game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the round game, the next round game is executed while the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the round game. If not, it is configured so that the next round game is not executed,
The round game ending means, when game balls pass through the specific area during execution of the round game, regardless of whether the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means has reached the specific number. First, means for terminating the round game being executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S610 to S612 by the main control device 81). game machine.

In the above configuration, when the specific area is passed during execution of the round game, the next round game is executed, but the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means has not reached the specific number. also ends the round game. In other words, if the player passes through the specific area early in the round game, the round game ends early. Therefore, when the game balls pass through the specific area at the timing when the game balls of the specific number enter the variable ball entry means or at a timing close thereto, the next round game is executed while continuing the round game for a long time. This makes it ideal for players. In this case, since the specific number of each round game is diversified, it is not uniform how many hits correspond to the specific number, and the ideal passing timing of the specific area fluctuates. become a thing. Under such a configuration, a specific notification for notifying the specific number of each round game is performed, so that the player can grasp what number of balls entered corresponds to the specific number, and the game can be played advantageously. it is possible to proceed.

Feature B17. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation is provided,
When the game ball is shot by the first shooting operation (the operation of shooting the game ball with the strength to enter the right entrance portion 504), the game ball entering the variable ball entering means can reach or reach the specific area. When the game ball is shot by a second shooting operation different from the first shooting operation (an operation to shoot the game ball with strength to enter the left entrance portion 505), the ball enters the variable ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature B16, characterized in that it is constructed such that the game ball that is shot cannot reach the specific area or is less likely to reach the specific area than in the case of the first shooting operation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to pass the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can determine the timing of passing the game ball through the specific area. In this case, if the player can know the specific number of games played in each round, the game ball can pass through the specific area at the ideal timing according to the skill of the player. Therefore, the value of the specific notification increases for the player, and it is possible to favorably increase the player's desire to implement the specific notification.

In addition, the invention described in the features B1 to B17 is "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, There is known a system in which a transition is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention of the industry.”

In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B17, the technical techniques shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation;
Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, a first transition means (main A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
After the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to a specific game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state. second transition means (function for executing transition processing when main controller 81 terminates opening/closing execution mode);
A gaming machine comprising
A specific area (falling area 703a) through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass is provided,
Provided with specifying means (falling winning sensor 703) that can specify that the game ball has passed through the specific area,
When it is specified that the game ball has passed through the specific area by the specifying means, or a specific event based on the specification by the specifying means (detection of the game ball passing through the falling area 703a Based on winning the lottery, the number of detection times of the passing of the game ball to the fall area 703a has reached a predetermined number, etc.), after the end of the special game state or from the specific game state, the specific game A third transition means (main A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends by the control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state does not shift to the specific game state, which is disadvantageous for the player. be able to. Moreover, since a game in which the game ball moves to a falling state or is avoided depending on the behavior of the game ball is realized, compared to a configuration based on internal processing such as a falling lottery, for example, the configuration is easier for the player to understand. In addition, it is possible to improve the original charm of the game machine by observing the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that, in this feature, the description that "the player is shifted to a predetermined game state or the normal game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and is different from the normal game state" is one of the game states. It does not mean that it is essential to have the predetermined game state, and the gaming machine according to this feature may not have the predetermined game state. That is, the above description states that "if the game state is changed to the normal game state or has a predetermined game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and is different from the normal game state, the predetermined game state Or, it can be interpreted as "transition to the normal game state".

Feature C2. Said third transition means, when said identification is performed by said identification means or when said specific event occurs, after the end of said special game state or from said specific game state to said predetermined game state or said normal game state On the other hand, when the specification is not performed by the specification means or when the specific event does not occur, after the special game state is completed, the game state is transferred to the specific game state, or the specific game state is continued. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that:

In the above configuration, if the game ball passes through the specific area, it is disadvantageous for the player, and if the game ball does not pass through the specific area, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to play a game with the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C3. A first mode that is provided corresponding to the specific area and permits or easily allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the first mode that does not allow the game ball to pass through the specific area. a switching means (shutter 706) capable of switching to a second mode which is less permissible than
Switching control to switch the switching means from the second mode to the first mode and then to the second mode based on a predetermined specific trigger (the occurrence of the winning of the upper limit winning number in the final round) at least once (function for executing shutter drive processing by main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, comprising:

In the above configuration, the switching means changes whether or not the game ball can pass through the specific area or the ease with which the game ball can pass through the specific area. You can expect to play. In addition, with the presence of the second mode, it is possible to secure a period in which the player can safely shoot the game ball, and it is possible to improve the amusement as a whole.

Feature C4. Equipped with a passing portion (winning sensor 702) through which game balls can pass,
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the specific opportunity is established based on the passage of a game ball through the passing portion.

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the specific area changes from a state in which the game ball cannot pass through or cannot pass through to a state in which the game ball can easily pass through. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game by not allowing the game ball to pass through the passing portion, and it is possible to enhance the amusement in combination with the configuration of the feature C2.

Feature C5. A ball entry section (large winning opening 32a), which is provided in a game area where the game ball shot by the shooting means can flow down, and into which the game ball can enter;
a payout means (payout device 96) capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls when a game ball enters the ball entry portion;
with
The passage portion is provided upstream or downstream of the ball entry portion in the game area, and is configured so that a game ball launched in a manner that can reach the ball entry portion can reach the passage portion. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that

For example, if a game ball is shot with a strength that does not reach the passing part, it is possible to avoid passing the game ball to the passing part, and the player can end up in such a shooting operation. With such a configuration, the significance of providing the passage portion and the switching means for switching between the state in which the game ball can pass through the specific region or the state in which the game ball can easily pass through the passage portion as a trigger is diminished. In this regard, in this configuration, a ball entry section is provided in which a game ball (prize ball) is paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and when the game ball is fired with a strength that can reach the ball entry section, the game ball Since the ball can reach the passing part, it is not possible to avoid the passing part in order to obtain the prize ball, and the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball passes through the passing part. It becomes possible to set off suitably.

Feature C6. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Variable ball entry control means (main controller) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state in the special game state and then to the second state at least once 81 function to execute the big winning opening opening and closing process);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein a game ball launched in a manner that can reach the variable ball entering means can reach the specific area.

In the above configuration, when the game ball is fired with a strength that can reach the variable ball entry means, the game ball can reach the specific area, so that the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means in the special game state. A game aiming not to let the game ball pass through the specific area can be imparted. As a result, when it is possible to avoid the game ball from passing through the specific area in the special game state, after the special game state ends, the game state shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, and the game is moved to the specific area. It is possible to provide a game that shifts to a predetermined game state or a normal game state that is more disadvantageous than the specific game state when the ball is allowed to pass. In other words, the game during the special game state is a joyful one in which the player can expect to obtain a large number of balls. It is possible to create both thrilling and exciting special game states that are highly interesting for the player and do not become work.

Feature C7. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Variable ball entry control means (main controller) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state in the special game state and then to the second state at least once 81 function to execute the big winning opening opening and closing process);
A first mode that is provided corresponding to the specific area and permits or easily allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the first mode that does not allow the game ball to pass through the specific area. a switching means (shutter 706) capable of switching to a second mode which is less permissible than
Switching control to switch the switching means from the second mode to the first mode and then to the second mode based on a predetermined specific trigger (the occurrence of the winning of the upper limit winning number in the final round) at least once (function for executing shutter drive processing by main controller 81);
with
The game according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the switching control can be executed by the switching control means while the variable ball entry control is being executed by the variable ball entry control means. machine.

For example, if the game ball can always pass through the specific area, the player may hesitate to shoot the game ball as a result of fear of the game ball passing through the specific area. In this regard, in this feature, since the switching means is provided for switching between the first mode in which the game ball can or easily passes through the specific area and the second mode in which the game ball cannot or cannot easily pass through the specific area, even if the game ball is shot, A period during which the specific area is not passed is secured. On top of that, since the switching control for switching to the first mode is performed during the execution of the variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state, the game ball is specified in the special game state It is possible to impart a game that encourages whether or not the area is passed, and it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the special game state.

Feature C8. The variable ball entry control means is a first period setting means ( A function to execute the big winning opening opening and closing process by the main control device 81),
The switching control means includes second period setting means (for shutter driving by the main controller 81) that sets a second period (open period of the shutter 706) in which the switching means is in the first mode in one switching control. function to execute processing),
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second period setting means comprises means for setting a period shorter than the first period as the second period.

In the above configuration, the variable ball entry means is set to the first state under a configuration in which switching control (switching to a state in which a game ball can or easily passes through a specific area) is performed during execution of variable ball entry control. Since the switching means is set to the first mode in a range shorter than the period, it is suppressed that the game ball is excessively likely to pass through the specific area in the special game state. As a result, the player can play the special game state with peace of mind, and by providing the specific area and the third transition means, it is possible to prevent the special game state from losing interest. .

Feature C9. A first mode that is provided corresponding to the specific area and permits or easily allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the first mode that does not allow the game ball to pass through the specific area. Equipped with a switching means (shutter 706) that can be switched to a second mode that is less permissible than
After a predetermined game start timing (opening/closing execution mode start timing), a first game (16R jackpot result A open/close execution mode corresponding to ) and
a second game (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a 16R jackpot result C) in which the switching timing becomes a second timing different from the first timing after the predetermined game start timing;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein

In the above configuration, there is provided a switching means for switching between a first mode in which the game ball can or easily pass through the specific area and a second mode in which the game ball cannot or cannot easily pass through the specific area. In this case, for example, if the switching timing to the first mode is fixed, the player can predict the switching timing. And there is a possibility that the interest of providing the third transition means may be lost. In this regard, in this feature, a first game that switches to the first mode at a first timing and a second game that switches to the first mode at a second timing different from the first timing are provided. are diversified. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the switching timing, and it is possible to suitably arouse the excitement of at what timing the first mode will be set. As a result, the effects of the specific area and the third transition means can be favorably exhibited, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Feature C10. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Variable ball entry control means (main controller) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state in the special game state and then to the second state at least once 81 function to execute the big winning opening opening and closing process);
with
The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the first game and the second game are games in the special game state.

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game state, the game state shifts (falls) to the predetermined game state or the normal game state. timing) has been diversified. Since the game ball falls when it passes through a specific area during the special game state, even though the sense of tension that is not present in the general special game state is given, the above switching timing is further added. is difficult to understand or difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to add a strong excitement to the game in the special game state, and it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game in the special game state.

Feature C11. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Variable ball entry control means (main controller) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state in the special game state and then to the second state at least once 81 function to execute the big winning opening opening and closing process);
with
The specific area is provided within the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can reach the specific area.

In the above configuration, the specific area is provided within the variable ball entry means, and the game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass through the specific area. As a result, by passing the game ball through the specific area during the special game state, it is possible to provide a game in which the game state shifts (falls) to the predetermined game state or the normal game state, and the game during the special game state. It is possible to suitably suppress monotonicity.

Feature C12. A first aspect provided in the variable ball entering means that permits or easily permits a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entering means to pass through the specific area; Switching means (shutter 706) capable of switching to a second mode that does not allow the game ball to pass through the specific area or is less permissible than the first mode,
Switching control to switch the switching means from the second mode to the first mode and then to the second mode based on a predetermined specific trigger (the occurrence of the winning of the upper limit winning number in the final round) at least once (function for executing shutter drive processing by main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to feature C11, characterized by comprising:

For example, if the game ball can always pass through the specific area, the player may hesitate to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means, which causes the ball to enter the variable ball entry means. The original game in the special game state of getting a prize ball is lost. In this regard, in this configuration, since the switching means is provided for switching between the first mode in which the game ball can or easily passes through the specific area and the second mode in which the game ball cannot or cannot easily pass through the specific area, the variable ball entering means is provided with the switching means. A period is secured that does not pass through a specific area even if the ball is entered. As a result, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means while preventing the game ball from passing through the specific area during the period of the first mode or in balance with the timing thereof. That is, it is possible to provide a game aiming at preventing the game ball from passing through the specific area while suppressing the loss of the original game in the special game state.

Feature C13. a first region as the specific region;
a second area (detection area of the V winning sensor 705) provided in the variable ball entry means, through which the game ball whose passage through the first area is restricted by the switching means can pass;
A benefit granting means (function for executing round update or ending start processing by the main control device 81) capable of granting a benefit (round continuation) to the player based on the game ball passing through the second region;
The gaming machine according to feature C12, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is essential to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means in order to obtain the privilege, it is suppressed that the player keeps avoiding the variable ball entry means and shoots the game ball. It is possible to appropriately exhibit the significance of the area (first area).

Feature C14. The special game state is
A round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times,
When the game ball passes through the second region during execution of the round game, while the next round game is executed, when the game ball does not pass through the second region during execution of the round game , is configured so that the next round game is not executed,
The gaming machine according to feature C13, wherein the privilege is execution of the next round game.

According to the above configuration, the next round game is not executed unless the game ball is passed through the second area, and the game in the special game state is not executed satisfactorily. It is possible to provide an opportunity to be excited and enjoy whether or not the game ball passes through the first area.

Feature C15. The special game state is configured such that at least one round game in which the variable ball entry control is executed can be executed multiple times,
The switching control means is means for performing the switching control based on the fact that the round game being executed or executed is the round game of a predetermined round (16th round game) A gaming machine according to any one of features C12 to C14, characterized in that it has a function of executing shutter driving processing by 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow the player to predict the round in which the game ball can pass through the specific area, and to provide a game to be enjoyed aiming at preventing the game ball from passing through the specific area.

Feature C16. The variable ball entry control means sets a specific number of times (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) as the number of times the variable ball entry control is performed in one round game or the number of times the variable ball entry means is placed in the first state. Equipped with means for setting the number of times to be set (function for executing setting processing for each round by the main controller 81),
The number of times setting means
First means for setting the first number (8 times) as the specific number (function for setting the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in the 1st to 10th rounds in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) When,
Second means for setting a second number of times (once) different from the first number of times as the specific number of times (11th to 16th rounds in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B of the variable winning device 32 function to set the number of openings) and
The gaming machine according to feature C15, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the number of times of variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means per round is diversified, the behavior of the variable ball entry means determines what round the round game in execution is. Indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish. Therefore, it is not possible or difficult to predict when the switching round to the first state (the round in which the game ball can pass through the first area) will arrive, and the configuration of the feature C15 can be favorably enhanced. be possible.

Feature C17. The third transition means changes the game state to the predetermined game state or the normal game state after the special game state ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area or based on the occurrence of the specific event. The gaming machine according to any one of features C9 to C16, characterized in that the game machine shifts to .

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game state, it is possible to provide a game that transitions (falls) to the predetermined game state or the normal game state after the special game state ends. This can be a practically preferable mode for realizing any one of the configurations of C9 to C16.

Feature C18. a ball entry section provided in a game area where the game ball shot by the shooting means can flow down, and into which the game ball can enter;
a payout means capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls when a game ball enters the ball entry portion;
with
The specific area is provided upstream or downstream of the ball-entering section in the game area, and a game ball launched in a manner that can reach the ball-entering section can reach the specific area. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a game aiming to prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area while the game ball is entered into the predetermined ball entering portion to obtain the prize ball.

Feature C19. The gaming machine according to feature C18, wherein the transition determination means executes the predetermined transition determination based on a game ball entering the ball entry portion.

In the above configuration, since the ball entry portion is a so-called starting port, it is not possible to avoid entering the ball into the ball entry portion while playing the game, and the game ball is launched in a state where the game ball can reach the specific area. I have to. As a result, it is possible to suitably arouse the feeling of excitement that the game ball will pass through the specific area, and to suitably increase the amusement of the game.

Feature C20. Said third transition means changes the game state from said specific game state to said The gaming machine according to feature C18 or feature C19, characterized in that the game is shifted to a predetermined game state or the normal game state.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific area while the game ball is entering the ball entering portion in the specific game state, it falls from the specific game state to the predetermined game state or the normal game state. It is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of the feature C18 or feature C19.

In addition, the invention described in the features C1 to C20 is "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, There is known a system in which a transition is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention of the industry.”

In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C20, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a first area (detection area of winning sensors 702, 802) through which game balls shot by the shooting means can pass;
A second area (detection area of the falling prize sensor 703, detection area of the high accuracy V prize sensor 803) provided downstream of the first area and through which the game ball can pass;
The first specific event based on the game ball passing through the second area or the game ball passing through the second area (winning the lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the fall area 703a, the fall area 703a Specific processing execution means (main controller 81 function to execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode by
A first mode (open state) that is provided corresponding to the second region and allows or easily allows the game ball to pass through the second region (open state), and that the game ball passes through the second region Switching means (shutters 706, 808) capable of switching to a second mode (closed state) that does not permit or is less permissible than the first mode;
A second specific event based on the game ball passing through the first area or the game ball passing through the first area (the number of times the game ball passes through the detection area of the winning sensor 702, 802 reaches a predetermined number of times) Execution of switching control for switching the switching means from the second mode to the first mode based on the occurrence of a lottery based on the passage of the game ball into the detection area of the winning sensor 702, 802, etc. switching control means (function for executing shutter drive processing or V allocation processing by main controller 81);
with
When the switching means is switched to the first mode by the switching control means, the ball passing through the first area triggered by the switching control can pass through the second area. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above configuration, there are provided a second area in which a specific process is executed when a game ball passes through, and a switching means for switching the second area to a state in which the game ball can or easily pass through the second area by switching control. Further, the switching control of the switching means is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the first area provided separately from the second area or the occurrence of the second specific event based on the passage. In this case, for example, if the specific processing is not desirable for the player, after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area, the shooting mode of the game ball is adjusted so that it does not pass through the second area. Such actions are assumed. If such cheating behavior becomes rampant, there is a risk that the fairness of the game among the players will be impaired. In this regard, in this feature, since the passing ball itself that triggered the execution of the switching control passes through the second area, it is too late to try to deal with it after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area. Such aggression can be suitably suppressed. As a result of this, the fairness of the game is ensured, the desire to play the game is aroused, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. Characteristic D1 characterized by comprising regulation means (right vertical passage portion 701, first passage portion 801) that regulates that the game ball passes through the second region without passing through the first region The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent unexpected game balls from flowing into the second area. As a result, the occurrence of disturbance is suppressed, and the fairness of the game can be favorably ensured. In addition, since it is possible to limit the flow of game balls that should be taken into account when designing the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden during design.

Feature D3. A passage portion (right vertical passage portion 701, first passage portion 801) capable of guiding game balls that have passed through the first region to the second region,
The passage portion is defined by a wall portion extending along the moving direction of the game ball moving in the passage portion,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the wall portion constitutes the restricting means.

For example, a configuration is conceivable in which a game peg provided between the first area and the second area guides a game ball that has passed through the first area to the second area. However, the movement speed of the game ball varies due to the irregularities between the game nails, and in relation to the period in which the switching means is in the first mode, the passing ball in the first area that triggered the execution of the switching control is the first. It is assumed that the behavior may become unstable because there are cases where the vehicle passes through the two regions or does not. In this regard, in this feature, since the game ball passing through the first area is guided to the second area using the passage section formed by the wall extending along the movement direction of the game ball, the movement speed of the game ball, etc. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in As a result, it is possible to equalize the time required for the game ball that has passed through the first area to reach the second area, and to stably move the ball passing through the first area, which is the trigger for executing the switching control, to the second area. It is possible to pass through the area.

Feature D4. After the switching means is switched from the second mode to the first mode by the switching control, the ball passing through the first area triggered by the switching control reaches the second area. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a configuration in which the ball passing through the first region that triggers the execution of the switching control passes through the second region.

Feature D5. The required period until the game ball that has passed through the first region reaches the switching means or the second region is the switching control after the game ball that triggers the execution of the switching control passes through the first region The path length between the first region and the second region is set so as to be longer than the period until the switching means is set to the first mode by The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a configuration in which the ball passing through the first region that triggers the execution of the switching control passes through the second region.

Feature D6. A passage portion (right vertical passage portion 850) that guides the game ball that has passed through the first region to the second region;
Means (protruding portion 851) capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball moving in the passage or stopping the game ball in the passage;
The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the game ball is decelerated or stopped in the passage, it is possible to lengthen the time required for the game ball that has passed through the first area to reach the second area. As a result, while keeping the passage length of the passage portion short, it is possible to stably pass the passing ball in the first region that triggers the switching control to pass through the second region. As a result, the entire configuration including the first area, the second area and the passage can be formed compactly, and the optimal configuration can be achieved in a game machine with a limited installation area for game parts.

Feature D7. The switching means has a movable body (shutter 865) displaceable between a first position (open position) corresponding to the first mode and a second position (closed position) corresponding to the second mode. cage,
A passage portion (second passage portion 862) that extends in the longitudinal direction of the game machine or in the lateral direction of the game machine and guides the game ball that has passed through the first region,
An opening (opening 864) that opens downward is provided in at least a part of the bottom (bottom 862a) of the passage, and the second region is provided below the opening,
When the movable body is arranged at the first position, the opening is opened so that a game ball can pass through, and when the movable body is arranged at the second position, the movable body is located at the opening. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein at least part of the bottom portion is composed of.

In the above configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first area is guided to the passage portion extending in the longitudinal direction of the game machine or in the lateral direction of the game machine, for example, compared to the case where the game ball is dropped in the passage portion extending in the vertical direction, the game ball is dropped. can be slowed down. On top of that, the movable body is displaced to the first position and the second position, and the second passage part is dropped downward in the process of passing the game ball and led to the second area, so that the switch control is executed. A ball passing through the first area can be guided to the second area with a margin. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably suppress the adjustment action after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area.

Feature D8. In a situation where the movable body is arranged at the second position and at least a part of the bottom portion is formed by the movable body, the moving speed of the game ball moving on the movable body is reduced or the moving speed of the game ball moving on the movable body is reduced. A gaming machine according to feature D7, characterized by comprising a means capable of stopping a game ball.

With the above configuration, it is possible to more reliably guide the ball passing through the first area, which triggered the execution of switching control, to the second area. Also, depending on the degree of deceleration or stagnation, not only the passing ball that triggers the switching control but also the game ball that passed the first area before the passing ball can be guided to the second area. This makes it possible to more preferably suppress the adjustment action after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the configuration is such that the player is more advantageous when the specific process is not executed than when the specific process is executed.

In the above configuration, when the specific process is executed, it is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area, the shooting mode of the game ball is adjusted so that it does not pass through the second area. There is a risk that an act of adjustment will be taken. Under such a configuration, by having the configuration described in any one of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the cheating action of avoiding the passage of the game ball to the second area. .

Feature D10. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, a first transition means (main A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
After the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to a specific game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state. second transition means (function for executing transition processing when main controller 81 terminates opening/closing execution mode);
After the end of the special game state or from the specific game state, a predetermined game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and different from the normal game state, or Third transition means (function for executing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to the normal game state;
with
The specific process execution means is the third transition means,
The third transition means is means for transitioning to the predetermined game state or the normal game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area (executing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 81 The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that it has a function of

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the second area, the game state shifts (falls) to the predetermined game state or the normal game state. Actions may be taken to adjust the firing pattern so that it does not pass through the area. Under such a configuration, by having the configuration described in any one of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the cheating action of avoiding the passage of the game ball to the second area. .

Feature D11. Any of the characteristics D1 to D8, wherein the specific processing is to give a privilege (transition to a high probability mode) to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area The game machine described.

In the above configuration, since the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the second area, the shooting mode of the game ball is adjusted so that the game ball passes through the second area after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area. There is a risk that an act of adjustment will be taken. Under such a configuration, by having the configuration described in any one of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the cheating action of intentionally passing the game ball through the second area. .

Feature D12. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, a first transition means (main A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
After the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to a specific game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state. second transition means (function for executing transition processing when main controller 81 terminates opening/closing execution mode);
with
The specific process execution means is the second transition means,
The second transition means includes means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the passage of the game ball through the second area (function of executing transition processing when the main controller 81 ends the opening/closing execution mode). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the second area, the state shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player. There is a risk that the act of adjusting the shooting mode of the game ball will be performed. Under such a configuration, by having the configuration described in any one of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the cheating action of intentionally passing the game ball through the second area. .

Feature D13. Of the game balls that have passed through the first area, the passing balls that are not the execution trigger and that have passed through the first area after the passing balls that have triggered the execution pass through the second area. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, characterized by comprising a limiting means capable of limiting the.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more preferably suppress the adjustment action after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area.

In addition, the invention described in the above features D1 to D13 is such that "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, game balls are paid out based on the entry of game balls into a ball entry section provided in the game area. (For example, see JP-A No. 2004-81853).” With respect to the background art, “Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing attention to games in gaming machines.” This invention has been made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, for each configuration of the features D1 to D13, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first region (left entrance portion 505 or winning sensor 509) through which the game ball shot by the first shooting operation (operation to shoot the game ball with strength to enter the left entrance portion 505) can pass;
A second region through which the game ball fired by a second firing operation different from the first firing operation (an operation of firing a game ball with strength to enter the right side entrance portion 504) can pass (right side entrance portion 504 or winning sensor 802) and
When the game ball passes through the first area in the first game situation (the round game in which the shutter 808 operates in a high distribution mode), a predetermined privilege (round continuation) is given. a first means for making it more advantageous for the player than when the predetermined privilege is given (transition to the high probability mode) when the game ball passes through the second area in the first game situation; (a function of executing processing for V allocation by the main controller 81, processing for opening and closing the big winning opening, and transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode);
When the game ball passes through the first area in a second game situation different from the first game situation (a situation in which a round game is being executed in which the shutter 808 operates in a low allocation mode), the predetermined privilege is given. When the game ball passes through the second area in the second game situation, it is more disadvantageous for the player than when the predetermined privilege is awarded (the round does not continue and the high probability mode is entered). second means (function for executing V allocation processing by the main controller 81, large winning opening opening/closing processing, and transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the first area and the second area are provided in which the player can hit different game balls. In the first area, a predetermined privilege can be obtained regardless of the game situation, and in the second area. , under the first game situation, the player is more advantageous than when the predetermined privilege is awarded, and under the second game situation, the player is more disadvantageous than when the predetermined privilege is awarded. It is As a result, either the game ball is made to flow down to the first area to aim for the predetermined privilege, or the game ball is made to flow to the second area to take the risk of falling into a situation more disadvantageous than the predetermined privilege than the predetermined privilege. The player himself/herself can select whether or not to aim for transition to a more advantageous situation. In this case, since the player's decision affects the result of the game, the player can actively participate in the game, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. In addition, in the above configuration, a player who wants to enjoy a thrill while aiming to acquire a large privilege actively plays a game in which the game ball flows down to the second area, and a player who does not like the thrill moves the game ball to the first area. It is possible to play a game to flow down to the area. That is, it is possible to change the way of playing a game according to each player's taste and mood each time, and to provide various ways of enjoying with one gaming machine.

Feature E2. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the game state transition means (main A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
In the first period during the special game state (execution period of the 10th round game in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A), the first game situation occurs, and the first period during the special game state. Means (for each round by the main controller 81) for causing the second game situation in a second period (execution period of the 5th round game in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) different from A gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of executing setting processing of .

According to the above configuration, since the first game situation and the second game situation are switched in the special game state, the player can select either the first area or the second area while playing the special game state. You will be forced to choose whether to aim for , and you can play the special game state in a certain sense of tension. As a result, the game in the special game state can be greatly excited compared to the case where the special game state is simply digested, and it is possible to favorably increase the player's willingness to play the game.

Feature E3. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Switching control means for executing switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81); ,
with
The special game state has a configuration in which a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times,
The first game situation is a situation in which the first round game (the 10th round game in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) is being executed in the special game state, and the second game situation is the situation in which the game is being executed. Feature E2 characterized in that a second round game (fifth round game in opening/closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result A) different from the first round game is being executed in the special game state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, one round game in the special game state is in the first game state, and another one round game is in the second game state, so that the player can be in the first area in the round game. The player is forced to choose which of the second areas to aim at, and the special game state can be played in a constant sense of tension.

Feature E4. The special game state is provided with a plurality of modes (opening and closing execution modes corresponding to 16R jackpot result A to 16R jackpot result C),
In the special game state of the first mode (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A), the round game of the predetermined round (round game of the tenth round) becomes the first round game, and the first mode is In the special game state (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) of the different second mode, the round game of the predetermined round is configured to be the second round game. A gaming machine described in E3.

According to the above configuration, even if the round game is the same predetermined round, depending on the type of the special game state, it is different whether it is the first round game or the second round game, and the round ( timing) are diversified. That is, since the round in which the player should target the second area is not unequivocally determined, it is possible to enhance the fun of aiming at the first area and the second area while predicting the round.

Feature E5. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32) and
Switching control means for executing switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state (function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81); ,
with
The special game state has a configuration in which a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times, and a predetermined condition (a game ball continues to win V during the execution of the round game). passing through the detection area of the sensor 807) is established, the next round game is executed, while the predetermined condition is not established during the execution of the round game, the next round game is executed. configured to prevent
The predetermined condition is established when the game ball passes through the first area,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, wherein the predetermined benefit is execution of the next round game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game aiming at transitioning to an advantageous situation (more advantageous than round continuation) by taking the risk that the next round game will not be executed and the special game state will end. , it is possible to suitably liven up the game during the special game state.

Feature E6. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is less likely to enter than the first state. 32),
In the special game state, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then switching control is executed to change it to the second state,
The first area and the second area are provided within the variable ball entry means,
Characteristic features E2 through E2, characterized in that both the game ball shot by the first shooting operation and the game ball shot by the second shooting operation are capable of entering the variable ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of E5.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to select whether to pass the game ball through the first area or pass the game ball through the second area while making the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. In other words, it is possible to suitably suppress the loss of the original game in the special game state, such as a decrease in the ball entry rate to the variable ball entry means, when any one of the areas is selected to allow the game ball to pass through. Therefore, it is possible to favorably combine the game of aiming at which of these areas and the game of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and the configuration is suitable for livening up the game during the special game state. can do.

Feature E7. Transition determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination by the main controller 81) for executing a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger;
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the game state transition means (main A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
When a predetermined specific condition (that the game ball passes through the detection area of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803) is met, after the special game state is finished, it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A second transition means that can shift to a specific game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) different from the special game state (transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode by the main controller 81 is executed function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball passes through the second area in the first gaming situation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which only the player who has the courage to aim for the second area can acquire the transition to the specific game state, and the player can decide whether or not to take the risk by his/her own will. It is possible to suitably liven up selectable games. When this feature is applied to the feature E5, it is possible to realize a game aiming to transition to a specific game state at the risk of ending the special game state without executing the next round game. It is possible to suitably liven up the game during the special game state." can be obtained.

Feature E8. In the first means, when the game ball passes through the second area in the first gaming situation, the predetermined privilege and another privilege (transition to the high probability mode) different from the predetermined privilege Features E1 to E7 characterized by comprising means (third passage portion 806) for making the provision of the privilege more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined benefit is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the second area in the first game situation, both the predetermined privilege and other privilege are obtained. For this reason, it is possible to select whether or not to aim for further addition after the acquisition of the predetermined privilege is guaranteed, instead of choosing between the predetermined privilege and another privilege. As a result, the attractiveness of passing the game ball through the second area can be improved, and the game in which the player selects whether to pass the game ball through the first area or the second area can be favorably enhanced. become.

Feature E9. a specific area provided downstream of the second area (detection area of high accuracy V winning sensor 803);
Provided between the second area and the specific area, game balls that have passed through the second area can be distributed to the specific area side and a side different from the specific area side (discharge sensor 805 side) Distribution means (shutter 808);
In the case of the first game situation, the distribution means is set to a first mode (high distribution mode) in which game balls that have passed through the second area can be distributed or easily distributed to the specific area side, and In the case of a 2-game situation, a second mode in which the sorting means cannot sort the game balls that have passed through the second area to the side of the specific area or is more difficult to sort to the side of the specific area than in the first mode. Distribution control means for (low distribution mode) (function for executing V distribution processing by main control device 81);
with
The game according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined privilege is granted. machine.

In the above configuration, the specific area is provided downstream of the second area, instead of determining whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous by the internal processing immediately after the game ball has passed through the second area. At the same time, a distribution means is provided between the second area and the specific area, and the movement of the game ball that has passed through the second area is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area or not. minute is done. As a result, it is possible to bring out the original charm of the game machine, which is to enjoy watching the behavior of the game ball, and to realize a configuration suitable for realizing any one of the features E1 to E7.

Feature E10. a second specific region as the specific region;
A first specific area (detection area of the continuous V winning sensor 807) through which the game ball that has passed through the first area can pass,
When the game ball passes through the first specific area, the predetermined privilege is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature E9, further comprising lead-out means (third passage portion 806) for leading the game ball that has passed through the second specific area to the first specific area or its upstream side.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has passed through the second specific area can also pass through the first specific area. As a result, when the game ball is passed through the second area in the first game situation, a predetermined privilege is also given, and the attractiveness of passing the game ball through the second area can be improved.

Feature E11. A first guide means (inner passage portion 404) capable of guiding the game ball shot by the first shot operation to the first area;
A second guide means (outer path portion 403) capable of guiding the game ball shot by the second shot operation to the second area;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since the launched game ball can be stably guided to each area, the game ball can be passed through the second area at the timing aimed by the player. It can be a practically preferable aspect in realizing either configuration.

Feature E12. The first means provides a first privilege as the predetermined privilege when the game ball passes through the first area in the first game situation, and the game ball passes the second area in the first game situation. When passing through, a second privilege (transition to high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is granted,
The second means provides the first privilege when the game ball passes through the first area in the second game situation, and when the game ball passes through the second area in the second game situation, The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, wherein neither the first privilege nor the second privilege is granted.

In the above configuration, the first area and the second area are provided in which the player can distinguish between the player's shots, and the first privilege can be obtained regardless of the game situation in the first area, and the second area is the , Under the first game situation, a second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege can be obtained, but under the second game situation, neither the first privilege nor the second privilege can be obtained. there is As a result, the game ball is made to flow down to the first area to aim for the first privilege, or the game ball is made to flow down to the second area, and neither the first privilege nor the second privilege can be obtained, and the second advantage is taken. It is possible to realize a game in which the player himself/herself selects whether or not to aim to obtain a privilege.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E12 is such that "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a payout of a game ball or the like is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area. (For example, see JP-A No. 2004-81853).” With respect to the background art, “Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing attention to games in gaming machines.” This invention has been made with the problem to be solved.

In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E12, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group E to each configuration of feature group A to feature group E detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine (ball-use reel-type game machine): Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol row. The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device for generating a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to players, furthermore, providing a ball receiving tray for performing a casting process for taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and dispensing game balls to the ball receiving tray. and a payout device, wherein the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in by the throwing device.

10 Pachinko machine 32 Variable winning device 60 Launch handle 401 Guide passage 504 Right entrance 505 Left entrance 507 V winning sensor 509 Winning sensor 702 Winning sensor 703... Fall winning sensor, 706... Shutter, 802... Winning sensor, 803... Accurate V winning sensor, 808... Shutter, 850... Right vertical passage, 851... Projection, 862... Second passage, 864... Opening , 865 ... Shutter.

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a first area through which a game ball fired by a first shooting operation can pass and through which a game ball shot by a second shooting operation different from the first shooting operation does not pass ;
a second area through which the game ball shot by the second shooting operation can pass and through which the game ball shot by the first shooting operation does not pass;
When the second shooting operation is performed in the first game situation and the game ball passes through the second area, a first privilege and a second privilege different from the first privilege can be given. a means to
When the first shooting operation is performed in the first game situation and the game ball passes through the first area, the first privilege is not granted and the second privilege is granted. means and
with
When the second shooting operation is performed in a second game situation different from the first game situation and the game ball passes through the second area, neither the first privilege nor the second privilege is granted. is configured as
When the second shooting operation is performed in the first game situation, it is more advantageous for the player than when the first shooting operation is performed in the first game situation ,
It is characterized in that when the second shooting operation is performed in the second game situation, it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the first shooting operation is performed in the second game situation. game machine.

Images